The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutSpecifications STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES RENOVATION PHASE II Project Manual & Specifications January 22, 2021 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect Richard McElhiney Architects, LLC 347 West 36 Street, Suite 1501 New York, New York 10018 STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES TABLE OF CONTENTS RENOVATION PHASE II Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedule Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES TABLE OF CONTENTS RENOVATION PHASE II Page 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section 03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES Section 06 20 00 Carpentry Section 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping DIVISION 08 -OPENINGS Section 08 80 00 Glass and Glazing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall Section 09 30 00 Tiling Section 09 72 00 Wall Coverings Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES Section 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPRESSION Section 21 05 00 Basic Fire Suppression Requirements Section 21 10 10 Piping Systems and Accessories Section 21 13 00 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 05 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements Section 22 05 23 Valves Section 22 10 10 Piping Systems and Accessories Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements Section 26 05 01 Basic Materials and Methods Section 26 05 26 Grounding Section 26 50 00 Lighting STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES TABLE OF CONTENTS RENOVATION PHASE II Page 3 DRAWINGS TITLE T-001 Cover Sheet, Drawings List T-002 Location Plans, Notes, Symbols & Abbreviations T-003 Site Plan, Staging & Access Diagram ARCHITECTURAL A-101 Overall Plan – Third Floor A-102 Overall Plans – Fourth & Fifth Floors A-111 Demolition Plan & Demolition RCP – Room Type 1 A-112 Demolition Plan & Demolition RCP – Room Type 2 A-121 Construction Plan & Construction RCP – Room Type 1 A-122 Construction Interior Elevations – Room Type 1 A-123 Construction Interior Elevations – Room Type 1 A-124 Construction Plan & Construction RCP – Room Type 2 A-125 Construction Interior Elevations – Room Type 2 A-126 Construction Interior Elevations – Room Type 2 A-501 Details – Room Type 1 & 2 A-510 Vanity Plans, Elevations & Details Room – Room Type 1 & 2 A-601 Finish Schedule – Room Type 1 & 2 A-602 Fixture Schedule – Room Type 1 & 2 A-603 Fixture Schedule – Room Type 1 & 2 PLUMBING P-000 General Notes, Symbols List and Schedules – Plumbing P-200 Typical Room Layouts - Plumbing ELECTRICAL E-000 General Notes & Symbols List E-100 Typical Guestrooms Electrical Demolition E-200 Typical Rooms Electrical New Work E-300 Luminaire Schedule & Details END OF DOCUMENT Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Richard McElhiney Architects, LLC 347 West 36 Street, Suite 1501 New York, New York 10018 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use. b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance. 3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 9:00AM, March 8, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/92020671989?pwd=SmJ2Y1lGSHUreDN1QUs4dVdqN0ZVdz09&from=addon In person, on site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below. 6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. 9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 3:00PM on March 25, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7 19. START OF WORK a. Upon discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work or the Project has been deemed essential, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder further agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration Schedule. 1. Work shall be completed by August 6, 2021. 2. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1 STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES RENOVATION PHASE II Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name: Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable Street Address, City, State, Zip Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated January 22, 2021 prepared by Richard McElhiney Architects, LLC, 347 West 36 Street, Suite 1501, New York, New York 10018, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows: • A goal of 2.3% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. • A goal of 3.4% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. 3. Milestone Dates a. Upon project being deemed essential or discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration. 1. Work shall be completed by August 6, 2021. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2 b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established. c. Following are additional Milestone Dates: d. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4 10. Acceptance a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. e. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (as applicable): f. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the sole discretion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the Work. g. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. h. Alternates: 1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. Addendum No. __ dated ____. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5 2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields Bid Proposal Certification Form (this Form) signed and executed Project Duration Schedule Bid Bond Proposed Project Team Resumes (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated: Rev 12.2018 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES RENOVATION PHASE II CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 12.2018 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 12.2018 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 3 Rev 12.2018 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 5 Rev 12.2018 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof are the property of the Owner and are not to be used on other work Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 6 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 12.2018 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 9 Rev 12.2018 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 10 Rev 12.2018 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev 12.2018 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 14 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. 15 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. 16 Rev 12.2018 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form. 17 Rev 12.2018 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19 Rev 12.2018 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 12.2018 D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 21 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 22 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 23 Rev 12.2018 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E- Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 24 Rev 12.2018 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 25 Rev 12.2018 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. 26 Rev 12.2018 Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 27 Rev 12.2018 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 28 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. 29 Rev 12.2018 Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Tami Norman) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. 30 Rev 12.2018 C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in the Bid Proposal Certification Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html. E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract. F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation. Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed. B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D". Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report 31 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor. ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. 32 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. 33 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. EXHIBIT "A" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK: NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address: Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date: % Goals MBE: 2.3% WBE: 3.4% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates (Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title: Signature: Date: MWBE Contract Percentages Summary % MBE Totals WBE Totals EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 2 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub- Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR:TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: Base Hourly Rate:$ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) *Worker's Compensation *Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$ * Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience modifications have been applied against manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project Number___________________________Evaluators; Project Team_____________________________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________ Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and accuracyc. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completenessb. Controlling of project schedule c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project schedulee. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safetya. Timely submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation of safety rules and regulationsd. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptlye. Timely submission of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questionsComments: Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:________________________________________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category %Scoring 1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0 4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0 5 Safety 0 10.00%0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0 7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectatio 5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS: (To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued. 1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses, entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of the foregoing elements. 2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site, project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing the Contracted Work. 2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary to engage in qualifying construction activities. 2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to: 2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site 2 2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State Executive Orders 2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with all applicable job site safety requirements 2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County, City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of the Work for the duration of the contract. 3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices are in place, not for substantive review or approval. 3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion. 4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf 4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home 4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html 3 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative. 6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any on- site construction activity. JANUARY 22, 2021 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES RENOVATION PHASE II CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................2 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS ............................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ..............................................................1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2 1.5 PARKING ..........................................................................................................2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS...................................................................4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................6 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .............................................................................................6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ..........................................................8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................8 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...........................................................................1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS .................................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................1 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3 1.5 SAMPLES..........................................................................................................4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................5 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................................7 1.9 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................8 1.10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................8 1.11 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8 1.12 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................9 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................................10 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................................10 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1 1.3 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................2 1.4 LEAD .................................................................................................................3 1.5 SITE VISITS ......................................................................................................3 1.6 CONFINED SPACE ..........................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...............................................................................2 1.6 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................................................2 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..............................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES .............................................................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.3 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................1 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2 1.5 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ..............................................................................4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................17 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................17 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4 TESTING ...........................................................................................................3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................3 2.5 SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................5 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................5 2.10 SECURITY ........................................................................................................5 2.11 FIELD OFFICES ...............................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................5 3.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5 3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................6 3.3 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................6 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ..............................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................3 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................3 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE .................................................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ...................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES .................................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4 2.1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................4 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5 3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5 3.4 CLEANING .......................................................................................................7 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...........................................................................................3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES .............................................3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED .............................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING ....................................................................................................1 1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work to be Done 1. Provide temporary partitions and/or protection at work areas and for all existing elements to remain. Maintain proper egress at all times. 2. Remove existing floor, wall, and ceiling finishes as indicated in the suites and the suite bathrooms. Prepare all surfaces to receive new finishes, including carpet, ceramic wall and floor tile, wallcoverings, or paint. Provide and install or install Owner provided materials as indicated on the drawings. Install new floor and ceiling trim. Install Owner provided window sheers. 3. Remove select wall partitions and/or material and replace with new. All existing building element fire ratings shall be maintained. 4. Provide and install new sliding glass shower/bath doors and hardware. 5. Remove existing and reinstall, provide and install, and install Owner provided bathroom fixtures and accessories, including but not limited to shower plumbing fixtures, shower pans and curbs, drains, tubs, sinks, faucets, grab bars, toilets, toilet paper holders, robe hooks, mirrors, wood shower seats, and metal and stone vanities. 6. Remove and install new lighting, electrical devices and faceplates, and switches. Adjust existing mechanical, electrical, fire protection, and electrical systems required for the work. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts. B. Concurrent Work: 1. There will be another project at the Statler Hotel entrance for the demolition and renovation of the porte-cochere happening during the same time as this project. C. New York State Electric & Gas (NYSEG): 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the project management of NYSEG work including coordinating any scheduling associated with the Project. 2. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost associated with the work to be performed by NYSEG. No NYSEG costs shall be carried in the Contractor’s bid. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. Refer to drawings A-601 Finish Schedule and A-602 and A-603 Plumbing Fixture Accessories, Lighting Schedule for a listing of materials and products the Owner is providing to the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and install Owner furnished equipment as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications. C. Storage 1. Upon written acknowledgment by Contractor of receipt in proper condition, the Contractor shall maintain responsibility for proper storage and protection of the equipment. Provide insurance for the Owner-furnished products up to the time of Final Acceptance by the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Receiving and Unloading 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for logging in, checking and verifying receipt of items and shall be responsible for confirming that the quantities and condition of the materials are appropriate for installation and the completion of the Work of the project. 2. The Contractor shall note any damage and/or short count on the Bill of Loading for any Owner Furnished Equipment received at the storage facility, such listing of damages or short count being required to establish the Owner's potential claim against the carrier. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner directly on any such damage and/or short count. 3. Unload Owner Furnished Equipment at the job site using necessary care and equipment as required to handle the equipment in a safe manner. 4. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers necessary to handle, receive and install Owner Furnished Equipment. 5. Install Owner Furnished Equipment as called for in the Drawings or in these Specifications. E. Installation 1. Install products in conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Provide interconnecting structures, equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a complete and functional system. F. Use of Materials 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of Owner provide materials in an efficient manner in accordance with industry standards and best practices to reduce waste materials. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations. B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Tami Norman) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. 4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: 1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. 2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect all adjacent work. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Existing or Archived Drawings 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required. 1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): a. Commencement Weekends  Saturday, May 29, 2021  Sunday, May 30, 2021 b. Reunion Weekend  Thursday, June 10, 2021  Friday, June 11, 2021  Saturday, June 12, 2021  Sunday, June 13, 2021 2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Friday, May 28, 2021 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon Thursday, Friday June 10-11, 2021 Reunion guest arrivals- no work outside fence; no demo or utility work inside fence Friday, June 11, 2021 Reunion weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Normal work hours are 7:00AM-3:30PM Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products. 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved. 3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage. 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-8 SUITES RENO PHASE II PRODUCT OPTIONS JANUARY 22, 2021 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT STATLER HOTEL GUEST ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II (ePM) SYSTEM JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project. B. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. B. Training 1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT STATLER HOTEL GUEST ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II (ePM) SYSTEM JANUARY 22, 2021 2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly 4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-construction surveys. 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends. F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited. G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT STATLER HOTEL GUEST ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II (ePM) SYSTEM JANUARY 22, 2021 I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification Sections K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats. L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT STATLER HOTEL GUEST ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II (ePM) SYSTEM JANUARY 22, 2021 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein. C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE STATLER HOTEL GUEST CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Site clearing b. Site utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE STATLER HOTEL GUEST CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 c. Foundation work d. Structural framing e. Subcontractor work f. Equipment installations g. Finishes h. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE STATLER HOTEL GUEST CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION STATLER HOTEL GUEST PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Submittals 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. 2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs. 3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction. 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review. C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan. 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings 6. Certification of Asbestos free products 7. Owner audio/visual 8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non- electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review) 2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required) 10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in section 01 32 16. F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1.9 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual. 1.10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.11 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. 6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.12 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety 1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply. 2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 ASBESTOS A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Based on the above, disposal of asbestos containing material is not anticipated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.4 LEAD A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.5 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. 1.6 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” October 20, 2014 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University - Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Statler Hotel (Bldg. 2033A) Guestroom Floors 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 Guestrooms and Corridors Supplemental Asbestos Bulk Sampling - Bulk Sample Report Cornell Work Order No. 7043661 Delta Project No.: 2014.030.424 Dear Mr. Houseknecht: Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Forms, the associated Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets, and the Sample Location Drawings for the bulk sampling performed by Delta Certified Inspectors Thomas Ferro and Michael Staudt. The sampling was performed on September 24th and 29th, 2014 and addressed suspect wall and ceiling materials on the Seven Guest Room Floors referenced above that were not previously sampled. With the completion of this sampling, all accessible wall and ceiling system materials for the Guest Rooms (including Guestroom Bathrooms which is discussed under a separate Report) and associated hallways have now been sampled. A total of sixteen (16) bulk samples were collected representing four (4) suspect homogenous materials. Nine (9) of the samples collected were “Non-Friable Organically Bound” (NOB) representing three (3) homogenous materials. The remaining seven (7) of the samples collected were non-NOB’s representing one (1) homogenous materials. Results for all samples were reported as being either “Non-Asbestos” or as “No Asbestos Detected”. Bulk sample analysis was performed by AmeriSci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved/ accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all Non-NOB materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodology. Analysis of all Non-Friable Organically Bond (NOB) materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.6 Methodologies. If the PLM results were reported as “non-asbestos”, the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. “Positive Stop” sample analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous material set with multiple samples and based on this; all 16 samples collected were analyzed. Please reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for sample particulars and details. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services Att: Project Paperwork “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 2 of 4 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Guestroom Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form and Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2014.030.424 101A 101 3 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 302 Misc Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101B 101 3 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 302 MIsc Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101C 101 6 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 621 MIsc Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101D 101 6 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 621 Misc.Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101E 101 7 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 721 Misc.Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101F 101 7 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 721 Misc.Non-Asbestos Trace NA 2014.030.424 101G 101 7 Textured Ceiling Finish / Room 821 Misc.Non-Asbestos Trace NA 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.424 Asbestos Inspector: Michael Staudt Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 7 / TEM - 0 Building Code: 2033A HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Work Order No.: 7043661 Date Sampling Performed: 09/24/14 Date of Report: 10/20/14 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 7 Number Project: Statler Hotel Guest Bathroom Renovations: Guestrooms Supplemental Asbestos Bulk Sampling Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Cornell University Statler Hotel Guestroom Floors 3 through 9 Walls and Ceilings Supplemental Asbestos Bulk Sampling Page 1 of 1 “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 3 of 4 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Floors 3 through 9 Corridors Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form and Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2014.030.424 201A 201 3 Gold Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 30041 Misc ND ND ND 2014.030.424 201B 201 6 Gold Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 60041 MIsc ND ND ND 2014.030.424 201C 201 9 Gold Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 90041 MIsc ND ND ND 2014.030.424 202A 202 3 White Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 30040 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.424 202B 202 6 White Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 60040 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.424 202C 202 9 White Vinyl Sheeting, Wall, Corridor 60040 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.424 203A 203 3 Mastic, Floral Patterned Carpet, Corridor 30041 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.424 203B 203 6 Mastic, Floral Patterned Carpet, Corridor 60041 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.424 203C 203 9 Mastic, Floral Patterned Carpet, Corridor 90041 Misc.ND ND ND HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Work Order No.: 7043661 Date Sampling Performed: 09/29/14 Date of Report: 10/20/14 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 9 Number Project: Statler Hotel Guest Bathroom Renovations: Floors 3 through 9 Corridors Supplemental Asbestos Bulk Sampling Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.424 Asbestos Inspector: Tom Ferro Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 9 / TEM - 9 Building Code: 2033A Cornell University Statler Hotel Floors 3 through 9 Corridors Supplemental Asbestos Bulk Sampling Page 1 of 1 { AurnLScl AmeriSci New York 1 17 EAST 3OTH ST. NEWYORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 . FPX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Delta Engineers Date Received 091301L4 AmeriSciJob # 214094977 Attn: Stephen Prislupsky Date Examined 10101114 P.O. # 860 Hooper Road ELAP # 11480 Page 1 of 2 RE: 2014.030.424; Cornell University; Statler Hotel, Main Endwell, Ny 13760 Corridors, Wall Covering & Carpet Replacement Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.424-201A 214094977-01 No NAD 201 Location: Floor 3 - Gold Vinyl Sheet Covering, Conidor 30041 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Analyst Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 14.6 o/o 2014.030.424-2018 214094977-02 No NAD 201 Location: Floor 6 - Gold Vinyl Sheet Covering, Coridor 60041 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Analyst Description : OftW hite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 7 .7 o/o 2014.030.424-201C 214094977-03 /Vo NAD 201 Location: Floor 9 - Gold Vinyl Sheet Covering, Corridor 90041 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Analyst Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 6.5 % 2014.030.424-202A 214094977-04 A/o NAD 202 Location: Floor 3 - White Vinyl Sheet Covering, Corridor 30040 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Analyst Description: OfMhite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 0.9 % 2014.030.424-2028 214094977-05 A/o NAD 202 Location: Floor 6 - White Vinyl Sheet Covering, Corridor 60040 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Analyst Description: OfWhite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 3.1 o/o See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 214094977 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 2 of 2 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.424; Cornell University; Statler Hotel, Main Corridors, Wall Covering & Carpet Replacement Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.424-202C 214094977-06 Location: Floor 9 - White Vinyl Sheet Covering, Corridor 90040 Analyst Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 8.7 o/o No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 202 2014.030.424-2034 Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 36.6 % 214094977-07 Location: Floor 3 - Yellow Carpet Mastic, Floral Patterned Coat, Corridor 30041 IVo NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 203 2014.030.424-2038 Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 39.8 % 214094977-08 Location: Floor 6 - Yellow Carpet Mastic, Floral Patterned Coat, Corridor 60041 No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 203 203 2014.030324-203C Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 52.4 % 214094977-09 IVo Location: Floor 9 - Yellow Carpet Mastic, Floral Pattemed Coat, Corridor 90041 NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 10101114 Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: David W. Roderick - - -NAD/NSD =no asbestos NA =not analyzed; NtuPS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600/M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab |D11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National lnstitute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this reporl must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, Rl Cert#AAL-094, CT Cert#PH-O 1 86, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By:END OF REPORT @p o) =o) ot rtE.E =FE^! -nE EH b 4 =*'E= gts6'-d E gI$p ga-_ie ;6.9-o 6 0> g.eo 6 =624 c z.azJ (,,ar"(L Eo>,,dEES] E@zzzO) !E - (u[*ifi fiilpfe :bEE+E EE;t! 5E5o* Ioo== .=!sd1 sDo-o Q)(uii(/)(t) C ! E *$ E9E E F EAcgg s =I EE E:={ 3 F,occi::id: 9o9 U QY &56=-- !-I FF P e ElEig '-E rr.r -rJ E 6' fl:p:EE Hg5EE'a :E*o1-"Q -oiD =$"Q5L f;NE+58Ex'pcE ;EP+t€* HE =sil d(E E'6E€ro.6 strt 6E;fi B gg8trHEE EE IHEHH EE *Nlig€E SE N\ls[fiE s'\lE?s€ €t Nl$Es; ;#*Si=E*i' =Er\S 16 E 5€ H-:\iegar eEE EE E b Eh= crY',-=-86(F= Ei +EF;E En*EilsE =u.iE lE s e I e;e= E5; 6EgEEgEA E E EPEf B! 5 E o z o z oo zz t-qoqR;(oo)N (') (f) ltr) lr, o)<odc'i qF- <f F- r.*':sfosaoqcod\f-(od-lf)o(o o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z o z r.- N rr N ol o? q_a_a?-<o d e.i o.i d oi o.to+;sFFO)O)O)@$O$Orto ooo(f) @ o)gooo13!E tbbo(.) @ N o) @ o ao-ao--o-o r.- o) o c) O) o (O o l'- * @ * l'- =-yo-orF$o$os-X-3c!tsd 3 d 3 .jB d I ., 8 .i I od .i5 dOaaAo<oorooE(Y)(OO)soiDiD!!!oooccc€€€EEEE.EEEE=iSEEEEEooo()ooo_o_o_- O - O - O or 1 or -- N -- <"r : co - <r: -O -O -O -O ol)O cDO cDO (5O (uO (E* P- P. P-.E ..E..E.r b * b N b'tr'tr'coool!tLtL ooo()()()EE.FoH'?.,H"*n6xt*flptgeE#F#H#HE N >N >* >X AN AX AN,E N,E X,E$,= s,= r,: s > v> + > $v $v +v :Esa:esCssssEFiS:E c! (?) c{ @ a( o N F) N (o a( o c! (.) N @ i( o) oooooooooo0-9-9-9-9-9ooLL LL tL tr tL tL LL tL 1l EEEEEEEEEooooooooo 9PPPPPPUP888888838 - Qor 9co 9+ 9ro 9<o 9t,- Qco Qor Qo-oJo-o-o-o-oJoJo- tts 8=EUJoFlto o o C,)o(L tt :g-"A 6=OJf;o. IEEE{SsEez' s9oE lt'=oJ(E<o(,o-o tr Eo Eq)o(g o-ot P0)o-LGoot*a (J, r-!JLo9o<trd .9G E=cpEO<Eoboc)-c6.s€3St-,,'<E -Yf JLogq(Eo6 L>q; LLl- 0)E> -LJ-(n_6cLo(.) tifc{-qo(f)q $pE ONq) l"- .cr- (,)o)c3UJoas6dvO #ai.oEooaz'5=abE5E oS -.1 o(E ='=-s9E-bgtho 9E= 3E'EEE EO>De oEr< {tg CL E(,(r, trgo '6 lt .tt I'= cLotrE(E<o \^\. = =lT rilI l-!:..ir o, <l O)o .ql Ffl 6A .\.etsor oo,fi, o_ it, idflv(ErUoo oL =oc.9a AA lJ.gu F'6=o=o6t o .g(,o o CL E(E @ o CL ()ooo \}a -ta ( \!a \\'t o { '.1J F \.L {?s tJ t- 3 R Cq Ai;JexidR .1,1 -J </ t\ i--- (, -, ( ){i$ ()v I ln I\t-\t\ft otEE o(! NA \\ JI(!o o f^ lq.] iJ fis il 3 ctlzl old,lot o-lol c, Iol o, (,!,o L t, .l a i1l1,.\ 'lli\I il\l>lmlolOT frl f' s( {Ji?s v.J2q( o {, g l.) , {rtt- !<:(r -v '/\N{( .,.{:e dfl.xxrl.< \ *EE XNE:u\c/ kiir& Y.9w \o sq. -,a-sv < O-$:(o H:(oY;' ,J)l -L,CQ O;c! (l), N ,=:ool(o =ixP(u il'L6,oEio;E=-=cf)o.lr-o(0 -oFo(oF-(f) z jo =EctII H(JO-r:o +itxo ;oES .Eo o G CD J 6 <i -{3f- )E |-{ gtrli ^iF{;<;oo+aoz “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 4 of 4 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Sample Location Drawings CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”). 2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier. 4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management. 5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 22, 2021 B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 22, 2021 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 22, 2021 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. (2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca. D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h. International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National Electric Code 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 6. All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.” L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor. W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract. Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes. AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.5 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES STATLER HOTEL GUEST REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required. iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL STATLER HOTEL GUEST QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire- protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees. 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor shall install Owner provided project identification signage. 2.10 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.11 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND CONTROLS JANUARY 22, 2021 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES STATLER HOTEL GUEST TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use. d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project. e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use. f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work 2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work. 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION STATLER HOTEL GUEST STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION STATLER HOTEL GUEST STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road location shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents. G. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION STATLER HOTEL GUEST STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION STATLER HOTEL GUEST STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. 3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following: a. Foundation construction b. Bearing and retaining walls c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in- place or existing materials. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition. a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING STATLER HOTEL GUEST CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II AND REPAIRING JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. Substantial Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced. - A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping fur a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas: 1. Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors. 2. Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include: a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT STATLER HOTEL GUEST PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork. c. Marking of duct-mounted damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers. d. Cleaning of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same. f. Removal of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof. g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion. h. Removal and reinstallation of ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning. i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning. 3. Cleaning shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations involved. b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building. c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000 cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine. d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at the furthest point of the supply ductwork. 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form. 1. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”. b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. c. Drawings in electronic format - Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format. d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide indexed PDF bookmarks. - Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: - Title of Project - Identity of separate structure as applicable. - Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Submittal Data: 1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. d. Certification as to asbestos free 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals. B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA STATLER HOTEL GUEST OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 SUITES RENO PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 22, 2021 D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours. 2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty. 3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility. 4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS STATLER HOTEL GUEST WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. Site related elements including: - Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data. e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems g. Geotechnical subsurface information h. Items that will require future maintenance i. Life safety critical items CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) a. Products where submittals are requested b. Final locations of all equipment. c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators. f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations. h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. 5. Environmental a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS STATLER HOTEL GUEST RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 SUITES RENO PHASE II JANUARY 22, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STATLER HOTEL GUEST SUITES RENOVATION PHASE II CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Demolition and removal of selected portions of building.2.Demolition and removal of selected interior finishes, fixtures and fittings. 3.Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B.Related Requirements: 1.Division 01 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.2.Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unlessindicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B.Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to preventdamage, and deliver to Owner at ground floor storage area. C.Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstallwhere indicated. D.Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed andthat are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed andreinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 a. Window treatments at the Guestrooms b. Loose furniture in the Guestrooms C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Disconnect and cap utilities before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Remove and salvage the following items where indicated to be removed: Vanity tops, light fixtures, bathtubs, full-length mirrors and vanity mirrors. 2. Clean salvaged items. 3. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site designated by Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. D. The existing carpet shall be protected in all rooms. In rooms 702, 802, & 902 the carpet shall be protected prior to removal until the delivery date for the new carpet is confirmed. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. If Contractor elects to remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent, the Contractor shall clearly define his plan to the Owner and obtain the Owner’s approval before proceeding. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 1 SECTION 035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for application below shower bases. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. 2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 2 B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C). D. Reinforcement: Provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. D. Cure underlayment. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 3 E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-1 SECTION 062000 CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the carpentry work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Blocking and miscellaneous wood. 2. Plywood backing panels for telephone, electrical closets, and select wall partitions. 3. Rough hardware. 4. Installation only of finish hardware. 5. Installation only of doors and hollow metal frames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Steel Doors and Frames - Section 081113. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20. B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1 and American Plywood Assoc. (APA). C. Shop fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on-site fabrication. D. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. a. S-Dry: Maximum nineteen (19) percent moisture content as per ASTM D 2016. E. Installation of doors, frames and hardware shall conform to the minimum standards of "Installation Guides for Doors and Hardware" of the Door and Hardware Institute. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Pressure Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards. B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treatment material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver carpentry materials to the site ready to use with each piece of lumber clearly marked as to grade, type and mill, and place in an area protected from the elements. B. Deliver rough hardware in sealed kegs and/or other containers which shall bear labels as to type and kind. C. Pile lumber for rough usage, when delivered to the site in stacks to insure drainage and with a minimum clearance of six (6) inches above grade. Cover stacks with tarpaulins or other watertight coverings. Store grounds and similar small sized lumber inside the building as soon as possible after delivery. D. Do not store seasoned lumber in wet or damp portions of the building. E. Protect fire retardant treated materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. F. Remove delivered materials which do not conform to specified grading rules or are otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. G. All items specified in Section 087100 of this specification entitled "Finish Hardware" shall be received, accounted for, stored and applied under this Section. H. Hardware shall be sorted and stored in space assigned by Contractor and shall be kept at all times under lock and key. The safety and preservation of all items delivered will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Installer must examine the substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer and the Architect. B. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIAL A. General 1. All wood shall be sound, flat, straight, well seasoned, thoroughly dry and free from all defects. Warped or twisted wood shall not be used. 2. For miscellaneous wood blocking, grounds, furring as required, use Utility Grade Coastal Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, free from knots, shakes, rot or other defects, straight, square edges and straight grain, air seasoned with maximum moisture content of nineteen (19) percent. Wood shall be S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS-20. 3. Plywood and rough carpentry for telephone and electrical closets, provide 3/4" thick C-D EXT-APA plywood, fire retardant treated as specified herein. B. Wood Treatment 1. All interior wood material specified herein shall be fire retardant treated to comply with the AWPA standard U1 to achieve a flame spread rating of not more than 25 (UL Class "FR-S") when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E 84. The fire retardant chemicals used to treat the lumber must comply with FR-1 of AWPA Standard P49 and be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. a. After treatment, kiln dry to a moisture content of fifteen (15) percent; if wood is to be painted or finished, kiln dry to a moisture content of twelve (12) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Dricon" made by Arch Wood Protection Inc. or approved equal. Provide UL approved identification on treated materials. 2. For exterior blocking, roofing and sheet metal, pressure treat wood with copper azole, Type B (CA-B); ammoniacal copper quat (ACQ) or similar preservative product that contains no arsenic or chromium. Preservative shall comply with AWPA Standard U1, (.25 lbs./cubic foot of chemical in wood). a. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of fifteen (15) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Wolmanized Natural Select" made by Arch Wood Protection Inc. or approved equal. 3. Treated wood which is cut or otherwise damaged shall be further treated in accordance with the AWPA Standard M-4. 4. Preservative treated lumber, Wolmanized Natural Select bu Arch Wood Protection/Lonza. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-4 B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Products, Dricon (FRT) by Arch Wood Protection/Lonza. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Rough Hardware for Treated Woods and Exterior Use: Hot-dipped galvanized or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails: Common steel wire, untreated for interior work as per ASTM F 1667. C. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers conforming to the following: 1. Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 3. Lag Screws and Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Treated Woods and Exterior Use: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. E. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. F. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Standard expansion-shield self-drilling type concrete anchors where so shown or noted on the drawings, or where approved by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where carpentry is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-5 proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Hardware shall be carefully fitted and securely attached, in accordance with these specifications and the instructions of the various manufacturers. B. Unless otherwise noted, mount hardware units at heights established in Section 081113. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. G. All keys used shall be construction keys which are to be tagged with fiber discs as approved, clearly labeled with identifying inscriptions and then neatly arranged in a temporary cabinet. All construction keys shall be returned to the Owner. H. Adjusting and Cleaning 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 2. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES A. Preparation 1. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-6 2. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. 3. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. B. Installation 1. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install frames in accordance with ANSI 250.11-20001, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein. b. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. c. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. d. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. e. Frames set in masonry walls shall have door silencers installed in frames before grouting. f. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. g. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 3. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-7 5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the tolerance given in HMMA 841 of ANSI/NAAMM, current edition. 7. Steel Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames to the tolerances given in HMMA 841 of ANSI/NAAMM, current edition. a. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. C. Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. 3.4 BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. General 1. Erect rough carpentry true to line, levels and dimensions required; squared, aligned, plumbed, and securely fastened in place. 2. Shim where required to true up furring, blocking and the like. Use wood or metal shims only. 3. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure work in place and to perform the work included herein. Do all the cutting and fitting of carpentry work, for the work of other trades as required. B. Blocking and Miscellaneous Wood 1. Furnish and install all wood grounds, furring, blocking, curbs, bucks, nailers, etc., that may be necessary and required in connection with the carpentry and with the work described for any other trades and including required carpentry for electrical fixtures. All blocking and nailers shall be continuous wherever required, whether or not so indicated. 2. Blocking shall be as required for the proper installation of the finished work and for items in mechanical sections as required. Blocking, edgings, stops, nailing strips, etc., shall be continuous, unless distinctly noted otherwise. Provide blocking as required to install all equipment. Provide blocking and nailers where shown or required to fasten interior sheet metal work. 3. Fastening for wood grounds, furring and blocking shall be of metal and of type and spacing as best suited to conditions. Hardened steel nails, expansion screws, toggle bolts, self-clinching nails, metal plugs, inserts or similar fastenings shall be used, of suitable type and size to draw the members into place and securely hold same. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents CARPENTRY 062000-8 3.5 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Securely fasten rough carpentry together. Nail, spike, lag screw or bolt as required by conditions encountered in the field and the Contract Documents. B. Provide rough or framing hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings, and similar items of the best quality and of the proper size and kind to adequately secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. C. Secure rough carpentry to masonry with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other acceptable manner, with fastenings not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. Secure woodwork to hollow masonry with toggle bolts spaced not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. D. Countersink bolts in nailers and other rough woodwork and include washers and nuts. Cut bolts off flush with surfaces and peen as may be required to receive finished work. E. Inserts to secure wood nailers to concrete shall be malleable iron threaded inserts with 3/8" diameter bolts of length to allow for countersinking. Locate at end of each nailer and at intervals not exceeding thirty (30) inches o.c. F. Furnish to the mason for building into the work, or attaching the work which is to be built in, anchors, bolts, wall plates bolted to masonry, corrugated wall plugs, nailing blocks, etc., which are required for the proper fastening and installation for the work or other items as called for in this Section. G. Detailed instructions with sketches of necessary requirements, shall be given to the masonry trade showing the location and other details of such nailing devices. 3.6 CLEANING UP A. General: Keep the premises in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends and debris. B. Sweeping 1. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep all surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled. 2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 SECTION 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood shower benches B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For material and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: 1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and color, with exposed surface finished. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Quarter sawn mahogany solids. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood C. Wood Products: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1 made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 6. Veneer Core Plywood at vanity tops: Marine Grade Plywood. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardant- treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. C. Shower Benches: 1. Custom shower benches as detailed on the drawings. 2. Species: Teak 3. Finish: Provide finish appropriate for wet environment as recommended by the mfr. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 4. Also include concealed mounting brackets, 15” by A&M hardware and all required fasteners and accessories. 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium 2. AWI Finish System: [Acrylic lacquer] [Conversion varnish] [Catalyzed vinyl]. 3. Staining: Match architect’s sample. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install without joints in straight runs, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PROJECT CONDITIONS D. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet. E. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. Notify testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors and floor/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4 H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. F. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7 damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items: 1. UL-Classified Systems. C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables: 1. UL-Classified Systems F. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes: 1. UL-Classified Systems G. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants 1. UL-Classified Systems H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems I. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-1 SECTION 088000 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, glazing of the following: 1. Shower doors and side lites. 2. Bathroom panels. 3. Interior borrowed lites in doors and drames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Toilet and Bath Accessories – Section 102800 1.4 REFERENCES A. Comply with the recommendations of the following references unless more stringent requirements are indicated herein. 1. FGMA Publications: FGMA Glazing Manual. 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA TIR-A7 Sloped Glazing Guidelines and Glass Design for Sloped Glazing. 3. LSGA Publications: LSGA Design Guide. 4. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines and TB-3001 Sloped Glazing Guidelines. 5. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing, Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association. a. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. b. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. c. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-2 d. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 6. ASTM C 920, Elastomeric Joint Sealant. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on drawings and/or specified herein are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with all structural requirments and fire-rated glazing requirements. 2. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites installed 15 degrees from the vertical and under wind action. c. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/100 times the short side length or 1/2", whichever is less. 4. Thermal Movements (where applicable): Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements, including performance requirements. B. Submit compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, as well as other glazing materials including insulation units. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-3 C. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples of each glass and glazing material showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. 1. Submit complete range of samples of standard colors and patterns for ceramic frits at insulating glass. 2. Submit complete range of samples of sandblasted glass showing variations of grits and opacity achieved. D. Calculations: Provide wind load charts, calculations, thermal stress analysis, and certification of performance of this work. Indicate how design requirements for loading and other performance criteria have been satisfied. Document shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York. E. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for specified tests. F. Warranties: Provide written warranties as specified herein. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: For each glass and glazing type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years' experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials; and with a successful record of in-service installations similar in size and scope to this Project. C. Glass Thickness: Glass thicknesses shown on drawings and/or specified herein are minimum thicknesses. Determine and provide size and thickness of glass products that are certified to meet or exceed performance requirements specified in this Section. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. IGMA Publications: IGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." 1.8 TESTS A. Preconstruction Sealant Test: Submit samples of materials to be used to glazing sealant manufacturer to determine sealant compatibility. Include samples of glass, gaskets, glazing materials, framing members, and other components and accessories of glazing work. Test in accordance with ASTM C 794 to verify what type of primers (if any) are required to ensure sealant adhesion to substrates. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-4 1. Submit minimum of nine pieces of each type and finish of framing member, and nine pieces of each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass, including monolithic, laminated, and insulating glass for adhesion tests. 2. Provide manufacturer's written report and recommendations regarding proper installation. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature Limits: Install sealants only when temperatures are within limits recommended by sealant manufacturer, except, never install sealants when temperatures are below 40 deg. F. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and GANA Manual. 1. Protect materials from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame. 2. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than five (5) years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/FABRICATORS A. All glass and glazing used at the the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. The same manufacturer and the same furnace shall be used for all tempered and heat strengthened glass used throughout the project. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. PPG Industries 2. Guardian Industries 3. Corning 4. Pilkington 5. Viracon 6. AFG 7. Equal manufacturers pending approval. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-5 1. Low Iron Tempered Glass: Provide "Diamond Guard" by Guardian, or approved equal, tempered in accordance ASTM C 1048, thicknesses as indicated. B. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3, Kind FT, minimum 3/8" thick. Tempered glass must be certified by SGCC to meet applicable standards. 1. Performance Requirements for Tempered Glass a. Length and Width: For 2.9 mm to 6.0 mm; +/-1.6 mm. b. Diagonal: +/- 3.0 mm. c. Edgework: Belt seaming or diamond wheels. 1.5 mm seam of upper and lower glass edges. No sharp edges. d. Corners: No more than 3.0 mm from square. e. Float Glass Defects: Must meet the requirements of ASTM C 1036. The most common defects are scratches, stones gaseous bubbles and edge chips. Tables in the glass standards have limits for size/quantity of defects. f. Tempered glass shall have a minimum surface compression of 10,000 psi. g. Tempered glass to be heat-treated by horizontal (roller hearth) process with inherent roller-wave distortion parallel to the bottom edge of the glass when installed. h. Flatness Tolerances 1). Roller-Wave or Ripple: The deviation from flatness at any peak shall be targeted not exceed 0.003" as measured per peak to valley for ¼" (6mm) thick glass. 2). Bow and Warp: The bow and warp tolerances shall not exceed 1/32" per linear foot. 3). Fully tempered glass shall be heat soaked to EN 14179-1:2005-European Heat Soaking Standard. C. Laminated Decorative Glass: Provide muliple layers of clear low iron glass of equal thickness (1/8”), laminated together with a polyvinyl butyl interlayer, conforming to ASTM C 1172 and as follows: 1. Interlayer Color: Frosted or patterned to be selected by Architect. 2. Interlayer Material: Provide Eastman Chemical "Saflex" or "Vanceva," or DuPont "Butacite," 0.030" thick at vertical applications, and 0.060" thick at sloped or horizontal applications. 3. Minimum thickness of assembly 1/4". 2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with glass sealants, with laminated glass interlayers, and with any other surfaces in contact. All products shall be compliant in fire-rated assemblies. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-6 B. General Glazing and Cap Bead Sealant: Provide sealant with maximum Shore A hardness of 50. Provide one of the following: 1. Dow Corning 795. 2. General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000. 3. Tremco Spectrem 2. C. Backer Rod: Closed cell non-gassing polyethylene rod with rod diameter 25% wider than joint width. D. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Provide molded or extruded neoprene or EPDM gaskets, Shore A hardness of 75+5 for hollow profile, and 60+5 for solid profiles, ASTM C 864. E. Cellular, Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Provide extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene, Shore A 40+5, and 20% to 35% compression, ASTM C 509; Type II. F. Preformed Glazing Tape: Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with 100% solids content complying with ASTM C 1281 AAMA A 800 with integral continuous EPDM shim. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form. Provide Tremco "Polyshim II" or approved equal. G. Setting Blocks: Provide 100% silicone blocks with Shore A hardness of 80-90. Provide products certified by manufacturer to be compatible with silicone sealants. Length to be not less than 4". Width for setting blocks to be 1/16" more than glass thickness and high enough to provide the lite recommended by glass manufacturer. When thickness of setting block exceeds 3/4" the glass manufacturer must be consulted for sizes and configuration. In a vented system, setting block shall be designed so as to not restrict the flow of water within the glazing rabbet to the weep holes. 1. Shims: For shims used with setting blocks, provide same materials, hardness, length and width as setting blocks. 2. Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide silicone setting blocks where structural silicone occurs at sills and at insulating units with silicone edge seals. H. Edge Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants. Provide blocks with Shore A hardness of 55+5. I. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place. J. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide sealant backer rods, primers, cleaners, and sealers of type recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. 2.4 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-7 complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. 2.5 GLAZING SCHEDULE A. See drawings for locations: 1. GL-1: Laminated assembly with frosted interlayer. Glass thickness 1/8” each pane. 2. GL-2: Clear tempered monolithic glass for shower doors and side panel, 3/8” min. thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-8 C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire- safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. C. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.05 CLEANING B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-1 SECTION 092900 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum board work for partitions, ceilings, furring, and elsewhere where gypsum drywall work is shown on drawings. 2. Metal supports for gypsum drywall construction. 3. Acoustical insulation for gypsum drywall work. 4. Sealant for gypsum drywall work. 5. Concealed metal reinforcing for attachment of mirrors and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. 6. Taping and finishing of drywall joints. 7. Installing rings and frames in drywall surfaces for grilles, registers and lighting fixtures. 8. Bracing and connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Painting and Finishing- Section 099000. B. Rings for grilles, registers and light fixtures - Division 23 and 26. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following standards, as well as other standards which may be referred to in this Section, shall apply to the work of this Section: 1. The Gypsum Construction Handbook, latest edition, USG. 2. Construction Guide, latest edition, National Gypsum. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-2 3. ASTM A 568 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For" 4. ASTM C 475 "Standard Specification for Joint Treatment Materials For Gypsum Wallboard Construction" 5. ASTM C 645 "Standard Specification for Non-Structural Steel Framing Members" 6. ASTM C 754 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products" 7. ASTM C 840 "Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" 8. ASTM C 919 "Standard Specification for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications" 9. ASTM C 954 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness" 10. ASTM C 1002 "Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board" 11. ASTM C 1177 "Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing" 12. ASTM C 1178 "Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board" 13. ASTM C 1278 "Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel" 14. ASTM C 1396 "Standard Specification for Gypsum Board" 15. ASTM D 3273 "Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber" B. Allowable Tolerances: 1/32" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/16" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. System Design Load 1. Provide standard drywall wall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a lateral load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with deflection limited to L/240 of partition height. a. Drywall assemblies with tile finish shall have a deflection limit of L/360. 2. Provide drywall ceiling assemblies designed, fabricated and installed to have a deflection not to exceed L/360. D. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-3 applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by fire testing laboratories, or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and compliant with UL Test #2079; criteria for cycle movement for all field height wall sections requiring allowance for vertical deflection within framing details. E. Installer: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of specified materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system showing size and gauges of framing members, hanger and anchorage devices, wallboard types, insulation, sealant, methods of assembly and fastening, control joints indicating column lines, corner details, joint finishing and relationship of drywall work to adjacent work. B. Samples: Each material specified herein, 12" x 12", or 12" long, or in manufacturer's container, as applicable for type of material submitted. C. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit technical and installation instructions for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system specified herein, and for each fire-rated and sound-rated gypsum board assembly. Submit other data as required to show compliance with these specifications, including data for mold resistant joint compound. D. Test Reports: This Contractor shall submit test report, obtained by drywall manufacturer, indicating conformance of drywall assemblies to required fire ratings and sound ratings. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store and handle drywall work materials to prevent damage. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers or bundles, and store where protected from moisture, damage and from exposure to the elements. Store wallboard in flat stacks. B. Protect wallboard from becoming wet. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Provide and maintain minimum temperature of fifty-five (55) degrees F. and adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building in the area of the drywall work for at least twenty-four (24) hours, prior to, during and after installation of drywall work. Installation shall not start until windows are glazed and doors are installed, unless openings are temporarily closed. Space above suspended ceilings shall be vented sufficiently to prevent temperature and pressure build up. 1.8 JOB MOCK-UP A. At a suitable location, where directed by the Architect, lay up a portion of a finished wall and ceiling demonstrating the quality of work, including finishing, to be obtained under this Section. Omit drywall boards in locations as directed by the Architect to show stud spacing and attachments; after acceptance, complete assembly. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-4 B. Adjust the finishing techniques as required to achieve the finish required by the Architect as described in this Section of these specifications. C. Upon approval of the mock-up, the mock-up may be left in place as a portion of the finished work of this Section. D. All drywall work shall be equal in quality to approved mock-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Gypsum Drywall Panels and Accessories: U.S. Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific, CertainTeed Corporation, Lafarge North America, or National Gypsum Co. meeting specification requirements are acceptable. 1. All drywall products must be manufactured in North America. B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Metal Supports of Drywall Assemblies: Unless otherwise noted, provide products manufactured by ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Super Stud Building Products, Marino/Ware, or approved equal. 2.2 METAL SUPPORTS A. Metal Floor and Ceiling Runners 1. Channel Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless otherwise noted) galvanized steel, width to suit channel type metal studs. Use 20 ga. top runners with 1-1/4" minimum flanges. 2. Ceiling runners and head of wall connections at rated partitions shall conform to UL #2079 for cycle movement. Provide positive mechanical connection of framing to structure, allowing for vertical movement within connections. Minimum of 20 ga. galvanized steel for clips, 25 ga. galvanized steel for ceiling runners. Providing a friction free – anti-seizure movement capacity. a. As manufactured by the Steel Network, VertiClip or VertiTrack or equal made by Metal-Lite Inc. b. FireTrak (including stud clips) by FireTrak Corp. or equal made by Metal-Lite Inc. 3. "J" Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge galvanized steel, 1" x 2-1/2" or 4" wide (to suit detail). B. Metal Studs, Framing and Furring 1. Channel Type Studs: Channel type with holes for passage of conduit formed from minimum 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless heavier gauge is required to meet deflection limits) galvanized steel, width as shown on drawings. 2. Furring Channels: Hat shaped, formed from galvanized steel, 25 U.S. Std. gauge. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-5 3. Continuous 16 gauge x 8" wide steel wall plate screwed to studs as required for support of railings and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. C. Suspended Ceiling and Fascia Supports 1. Main Runners: 1-1/2" steel channels, cold rolled at 0.475 lbs. per ft., rust-inhibitive paint finish. 2. Furring Members: Screw-type hat-shaped furring channels of 25 ga. zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C 645. 3. Hangers: Galvanized, 1" x 3/16" flat steel slats capable of supporting 5x calculated load supported. 4. Hanger Anchorages: Provide inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices applicable to the required method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Size devices for 5x calculated load supported. 5. Furring Anchorages: 16 ga. galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard clips, bolts or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer. D. All galvanized steel members shall have coating conforming to ASTM A 653, G60. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD TYPES A. Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick "Sheetrock" by USG, "Gold Bond" by National Gypsum, or "Regular Gypsum" by CertainTeed Corp., 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick "Sheetrock Firecode C" by USG, "Firecheck Type C" by Lafarge/Continental, or "Gold Bond Fireshield" by National Gypsum, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. C. Water Resistant Backing Board for Tile Finish: 5/8" thick, "Fiberock Aqua-Tough" by USG, "Dens-Shield Tile Backer Board" by Georgia Pacific, or "DiamondBack Tile Backer" by CertainTeed Corp. Cover joints with a pressure sensitive woven glass fiber tape equal to Imperial Type P Tape. D. Moisture/Mold Resistant Gypsum Wall Board at locations listed below, unless otherwise shown on drawings: 5/8" thick "Mold Tough" or "Mold Tough FR" by U.S. Gypsum, "DensArmor Plus" by Georgia Pacific, "Mold Defense" and/or "Mold Defense Type X" by Lafarge/Continental, or "Gold Bond EXP Interior Extreme Gypsum Board" by National Gypsum, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. Board must have a rating of 10 per ASTM D 3273 with a core that meets ASTM C 1396, Section 6 or ASTM C 1658. 1. Walls and ceilings of spaces containing condensers, water tanks, water pumps and pressure reduction valves. 2. Bathroom ceilings. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-6 3. Walls of bathrooms that are not solely water closet compartments, other than walls specifically required to be cement board or fire-rated walls. 4. All building perimeter walls and wet shafts. E. Impact Resistant Wallboard: 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Fiberock Brand VHI Abuse Resistant Panel" by USG, "DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Panels" by Georgia-Pacific, "EXP Interior Extreme IR" or "Gold Bond Brand Hi-Impact XP" by National Gypsum, "Protecta HIR 300" by Lafarge/Continental, or "AirRenew Extreme Impact" by CertainTeed Corp., 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: Paper-less, non-combustible, semi-rigid mineral fiber mat, 2" thick, in walls (unless otherwise indicated), 3 lb./cu. ft. maximum density; Thermafiber LLC "Thermafiber," or approved equal. B. Fasteners for Wall Board: USG Brand Screws; Type S Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to lighter gauge interior metal framing (up to 20 ga.). Type S-12 Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to heavier gauge interior metal framing (20 ga. to 12 ga.); Type S and Type S-12 Pan Head for attaching metal studs to door frames and runners; and Type G Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to wall board. Lengths specified below under "Part 3 - Execution" Articles and as recommended by drywall manufacturer. C. Laminating Adhesive: "Sheetrock Brand Joint Compound." D. Metal Trim - Corner Beads: For 90 degree External Corners - "Dur-A-Bead" No. 103, 27 U.S. Std. ga. galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4", for 90 degree external corners. E. Metal Trim - Edge Beads: "Sheetrock Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim." F. Metal Trim Treatment Materials and Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Drywall Boards: Paper tape for joint reinforcing; Setting Type (Durabond 90) or Lightweight Setting Type Joint Compound for taping and topping; and Ready Mix Compound for finishing. 1. For mold-resistant drywall, water resistant drywall, and tile backer board, use glass mesh tape with setting joint compound that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. Acceptable joint compound is "Rapid Set One Pass" made by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp. or "Rapid Joint" manufactured by Lafarge North America or approved equal meeting standards noted herein. G. Control Joints: No. 0.093, USG. H. Acoustical Sealant: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or "Tremco Acoustical Caulking" of Tremco Mfg. Co., or approved equal. I. Neoprene Gaskets: Conform to ASTM D 1056. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where gypsum drywall is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on drawings and specified herein. 2. All metal framing for drywall partitions shall extend from floor to underside of structural deck above. Provide for vertical deflection with positive mechanical connections of framing members to structure. 3. Provide concealed reinforcement, 16 ga. thick by eight (8) inches wide or as detailed or as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment of railings and other items to be supported on the partitions which cannot be attached to the metal framing members. Concealed reinforcement shall span between metal studs and be attached thereto using two (2) self-tapping pan head screws at each stud. a. Back of drywall shall be scored or notched to prevent bulging out where reinforcement plate occurs. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, Underwriters' Laboratories and test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the fire-rated drywall assembly types indicated on the drawings. C. Acoustical Assemblies: Install acoustically-rated assemblies to achieve a minimum STC as noted on drawings, in accordance with test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the drywall assembly type indicated on the drawings. D. Sealant 1. Install continuous acoustical sealant bead at top and bottom edges of wallboard where indicated or required for sound rating as wallboard is installed, and between metal trim edge beads and abutting construction. 2. Install acoustical sealant in 1/8" wide vertical control joints within the length of the wall or partitions, and in all other joints, specified below under "Control Joints." Install bead of acoustical sealant around electric switch and outlet boxes, piping, ducts, and around any other penetration in the wallboard; place sealant bead between penetrations and edge of wallboard. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-8 3. Where sealant is exposed to view, protect adjacent surfaces from damage and from sealant material, and tool sealant flush with and in same plane as wallboard surface. Sealant beads shall be 1/4" to 3/8" diameter. E. Wall Board Application 1. Do not install wallboard panels until steel door frames are in place; coordinate work with Section 081113, "Steel Doors and Frames." 2. See drawings for all board types. Use fire-rated wallboard for fire-rated assemblies. Use sag-resistant board for ceilings. Use water-resistant wallboard where indicated on drawings and where wallboard would be subject to moisture. Install water-resistant wallboard in full, large sheets (no scraps) to limit number of butt joints. 3. Apply wallboard with long dimension parallel to stud framing members, and with abutting edges occurring over stud flanges. 4. Install wallboard for partitions from floor to underside of structure above and secure rigidly in place by screw attachment, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide "Thermafiber" safing insulation meeting standards of Section 078413 at flutes of metal deck where partitions carry up to bottom of metal deck. 6. Neatly cut wallboard to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping, ducts, and other items which penetrate wallboard; fill gaps with acoustic sealant. 7. Where wallboard is to be applied to curved surfaces, dampen wallboard on back side as required to obtain required curve. Finish surface shall present smooth, even curve without fluting or other imperfections. 8. Screw fasten wallboard with power-driven electric screw driver, screw heads to slightly depress surface of wallboard without cutting paper, screws not closer than 3/8" from ends and edges of wallboard. 9. Where studs are doubled-up, screw fasten wallboard to both studs in a staggered pattern. F. Cementitious Backer Board 1. General: Furnish cementitious backer board in maximum available lengths. Install horizontally, with end joints over framing members. 2. Fastening: Secure cementitious backer board to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 12 inches on center and not closer than 1/2" from the edge. Install screws with a conventional screw gun so that the screw heads are flush with the surface of the board. 3. Joint Treatment: Fill space between edge of backer and receptor with dry-set Portland cement or latex-Portland cement mortar. Fill all horizontal and vertical joints and corners with dry-set Portland cement or latex-Portland cement mortar. Apply fiberglass tape over joints and corners and embed with same mortar. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-9 G. Metal Trim: Install and mechanically secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; and finish with three (3) coats of joint compound, feathered and finish sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Corner Beads: Install specified corner beads in single lengths at all external corners, unless corner lengths exceed standard stock lengths. 2. Edge Beads: Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all terminating edges of wallboard exposed to view, where edges abut dissimilar materials, where edges would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings. Where indicated on drawings, seal joint between metal edge bead and adjoining surface with specified gasket, 1/8" wide minimum and set back 1/8" from face of wallboard, unless other size and profile indicated on drawings. 3. Casing beads shall be set in long lengths, neatly butted at joints. Provide casing beads at juncture of board and vertical surfaces and at exposed perimeters. H. Control Joint Locations: Gypsum board surfaces shall be isolated with control joints where: 1. Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or other vertical penetration. 2. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling. 3. Shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Ceiling dimensions exceed thirty (30) feet in either direction. 5. Wings of "L," "U," and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 6. Expansion or control joints occur in the structural elements of the building. 7. Shaftwall runs exceed 30' without interruption. 8. Partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 9. Partition or furring runs exceed 30' without interruption. 10. Where control joints are required, ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. I. Joint Treatment and Spackling 1. Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at internal corners of intersecting partitions and joints at internal corners of intersections between ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound. 2. Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be applied in three (3) coats, feathered and finish surface sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Treatment of joints and screw heads with joint compound is also Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-10 required where wallboard will be covered by finish materials which require a smooth surface, such as vinyl wall coverings. 3.3 FURRED WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Use specified metal furring channels. Run metal furring channel framing members vertically, space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Fasten furring channels to concrete or masonry surfaces with power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails spaced sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum through alternate wing flanges (staggered) of furring channel. Furring channels shall be shimmed as necessary to provide a plumb and level backing for wallboard. At inside of exterior walls, an asphalt felt protection strip shall be installed between each furring channel and the wall. Furring channel and splices shall be provided by nesting channels at least eight (8) inches and securely anchoring to concrete or masonry with two (2) fasteners in each wing. B. Wallboard Installation: Same as specified under Article 3.4 - "Metal Stud Partitions." 3.4 METAL STUD PARTITIONS A. Unless otherwise noted, steel framing members shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Runner Installation: Use channel type. Align accurately at floor according to partition layout. Anchor runners securely sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum with power-driven anchors to floor slab, with power-driven anchors to structural slab above. See "Stud Installation" below for runners over heads of metal door frames. Where required, carefully remove sprayed-on fireproofing to allow partition to be properly installed. C. Stud Installation 1. Use channel type, positioned vertically in runners, spaced as noted on drawings, but not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c. 2. Anchor studs to floor runners with screw fasteners. Provide snap-in or slotted hole slip joint bolt connections of studs to ceiling runners leaving space for movement. Anchor studs at partition intersections, partition corners and where partition abuts other construction to floor and ceiling runners with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange. 3. Connection at ceiling runner for non-rated partitions shall be snap-in or slotted hole slip joint bolt connection that shall allow for movement. Seal studs abutting other construction with 1/8" thick neoprene gasket continuously between stud and abutting construction. 4. Connections for fire rated partitions at ceiling runners shall conform to UL Design #2079. 5. Install metal stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are cut or wallboard is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations, and anchor horizontal bracing to vertical studs with sheet metal screws. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-11 6. At jambs of door frames and borrowed light frames, install doubled-up studs (not back to back) from floor to underside of structural deck, and securely anchor studs to jamb anchors of frames and to runners with screws. Provide cross braces from hollow metal frames to underside of slab. 7. Over heads of door frames, install cut-to-length section of runner with flanges slit and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely anchor runner to adjacent vertical studs with sheet metal screws. Install cut-to-length vertical studs from runner (over heads of door frame) to ceiling runner sixteen (16) inches maximum o.c. and at vertical joints of wallboard, and securely anchor studs to runners with sheet metal screws. 8. At control joints, in field of partition, install double-up studs (back to back) from floor to ceiling runner, with 1/4" thick continuous compressible gasket between studs. When necessary, splice studs with eight (8) inches minimum nested laps and attach flanges together with two (2) sheet metal screws in each flange. All screws shall be self-tapping sheet metal screws. D. Runners and Studs at Chase Wall: As specified above for "Runners" and "Studs" and as specified herein. Chase walls shall have either a single or double row of floor and ceiling runners with metal studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum and positioned vertically in the runners so that the studs are opposite each other in pairs with the flanges pointing in the same direction. Anchor all studs to runner flanges with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange following requirements of paragraph 3.4, B. Provide cross bracing between the rows of studs by attaching runner channels or studs set full width of chase attached to vertical studs with one self-tapping screw at each end. Space cross bracing not over thirty-six (36) inches o.c. vertically. E. Wallboard Installation - Single Layer Application (Screw Attached) 1. Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and with abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Install wallboard with long dimension perpendicular to framing members above and below openings in drywall extending to second stud at each side of opening. Joints on opposite sides of wall shall be arranged so as to occur on different studs. 2. Boards shall be fastened securely to metal studs with screws as specified. Where a free end occurs between studs, back blocking shall be required. Center abutting ends over studs. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth, true. 3. Wallboard screws shall be applied with an electric screw gun. Screws shall be driven not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of board to provide uniform dimple not over 1/32" deep. Screws shall be spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the abutting edges. 4. All ends and edges of wallboard shall occur over screwing members (studs or furring channels). Boards shall be brought into contact but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-12 5. At locations where piping receptacles, conduit, switches, etc., penetrate drywall partitions, provide non-drying sealant and an approved sealant stop at cut board locations inside partition. F. Wallboard Installation - Double-Layer Application 1. General: See drawings for wallboard partition types required. 2. First Layer (Screw Attached): Install as described above for single layer application. 3. Second Layer (Screw Attached): Screw attach second layer, unless laminating method of attachment indicated on drawings or necessary to obtain required sound rating or fire rating. Install wallboard vertically with vertical joints offset thirty- two (32) inches from first layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of wall. Attach wallboard with 1-5/8" screws sixteen (16) inches o.c. along vertical joints and sixteen (16) inches o.c. in the field of the wallboard. Screw through first layer into metal framing members. 4. Second Layer (Laminated): Install wallboard vertically. Stagger joints of second layer from first layer joints. Laminate second layer with specified laminating adhesive in beads or strips running continuously from floor to ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After laminating, screw wallboard to framing members with 1-5/8" screws, spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. around perimeter of wallboard. G. Wallboard Installation - Laminated Application: Where laminated wallboard is indicated, use specified laminating adhesive, install wallboard vertically and maintain tolerances as specified for screw attached wallboard. H. Insulation Installation: Install where indicated on drawings. Place blanket tightly between studs. I. Deflection of Structure Above: To allow for possible deflection of structure above partitions, provide top runners for non-rated partitions with 1-1/4" minimum flanges and do not screw studs or drywall to top runner. Where positive anchorage of studs to top runner is required, anchorage device shall be by means of slotted hole (in clip connection with screw attachment to web of steel through bushings located in slots of clips), or other anchorage device approved by Architect. J. Control Joints 1. Leave a 1/2" continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface mounted joint. 2. Back by double framing members. 3. Attach control joint to face layer with 9/16" galvanized staples six (6) inches o.c. at both flanges along entire length of joint. 4. Provide two (2) inch wide gypsum panel strip or other adequate seal behind control joint in fire rated partitions and partitions with safing insulation. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-13 3.5 DRYWALL FASCIAS AND CEILINGS A. Furnish and install inserts, hanger clips and similar devices in coordination with other work. B. Secure hangers to inserts and clips. Clamp or bolt hangers to main runners. C. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. D. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. E. Metal Furring Channels: Space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Attach to 1-1/2" main runner channels with furring channel clips (on alternate sides of main runner channels). Furring channels shall not be let into or come in contact with abutting masonry walls. End splices shall be provided by nesting furring channels no less than eight (8) inches and securely wire tying. At any openings that interrupt the furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability. F. Mechanical accessories, hangers, splices, runner channels and other members used in suspension system shall be of metal, zinc coated, or coated with rust inhibitive paint, of suitable design and of adequate strength to support units securely without sagging, and such as to bring unit faces to finished indicated lines and levels. Provide special furring where ducts are over two (2) feet wide. G. Apply board with its long dimension at right angles to channels. Locate board butt joints over center of furring channels. Attach board with one (1) inch self-drilling drywall screws twelve (12) inches o.c. in field of board at each furring channel; eight (8) inches o.c. at butt joints located not less than 3/8" from edges. 3.6 FINISHING A. Taping: A thin, uniform layer of compound shall be applied to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over the joint, seated into the compound. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall not function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. B. Filling: After initial coat of compound has hardened, additional compound shall be applied, filling the board taper flush with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least four (4) inches on either side of the tape. No fill coat is necessary on interior angles. C. After compound has hardened, a finishing coat of compound shall be spread evenly over and extending slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a smooth, uniform finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound, and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sanding shall be done Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-14 between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface, ready for painting. D. Fastener Depressions: Compound shall be applied to all fastener depressions followed, when hardened by at least two (2) coats of compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. E. Finishing Beads and Trim: Compound shall be applied to all bead and trim and shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of the surface. When hardened, this shall be followed by two (2) coats of compound each extending slightly beyond the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the surface and sanded as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration. F. Except as otherwise noted, level of finish for surface exposed to view shall conform to Level 5 of ASTM C 840 and GA-214 of the Gypsum Association. G. Drywall construction with defects of such character which will mar appearance of finished work, or which is otherwise defective, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Owner. 3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the completion of installation of the work, all rubbish shall be removed from the building leaving floors broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other equipment shall be removed from the building. Work shall be left in clean condition ready for painting or wall covering. All work shall be approved by the Architect. B. Cutting and Repairing: Include all cutting, fitting and repairing of the work included herein in connection with all mechanical trades and all other trades which come in conjunction with any part of the work, and leave all work complete and perfect after all trades have completed their work. 3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 1 SECTION 093000 TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Dimension stone tile and related setting materials applied to floors and walls. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Waterproof membrane. 5. Acoustic Treatment/Crack isolation membrane. 6. Tile backing panels. 7. Metal edge strips. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 2 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. Sample required for material reference along with slab photos to control variance during review/submittal process 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. G. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Acoustic treatment/Crack isolation membrane. 4. Joint sealants. 5. Cementitious backer units. 6. Metal edge strips. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 3 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 4 C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide mesh-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile Type BR/TL-01: Porcelain Floor Tile 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Floortech Floor 1.0, Rectified - Matte, as distributed by Stone Source/ Brant Adams (212) 979-6400; brant@stonesource.com. 2. Module Size: 24” x 24” 3. Thickness: 10mm. 4. Face: Plain with square edges. 5. Finish: Matte. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: 1.0 Soft. Pattern as indicated on drawings. 7. Grout Color: Laticrete #90 Light Pewter, 1/16” B. Tile Type BR/TL-01A: Porcelain Tile Wall Base. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Floortech Floor 1.0, Bullnose - Soft, as distributed by Stone Source/ Brant Adams (212) 979-6400; brant@stonesource.com. 2. Module Size: 2” x 24” 3. Thickness: 10mm. 4. Face: Plain with square edges and bullnose edge. 5. Tile Color and Pattern: 1.0 Soft. Pattern as indicated on drawings. 6. Grout Color: Laticrete #90 Light Pewter, 1/16” 7. Top Edge: Bulnose C. Tile Type BR/TL-02: Porcelain Wall Tile. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Floortech Floor 1.0, Rectified - Soft, as distributed by Stone Source/Brant Adams (212) 979-6400; brant@stonesource.com. 2. Module Size: 12” x 24” 3. Thickness: 10mm. 4. Face: Plain with square edges. 5. Finish: Soft 6. Tile Color and Pattern: 1.0 Soft. Pattern as indicated on drawings. 7. Grout Color: Laticrete #90 Light Pewter, 1/16” D. Tile Type BR/TL-03: Mosaic Wall Accent Tile – glass, stone, mother of pearl. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Porcelanosa, Tribal Pearl White, Item L244001101. Marisa Bordonaro (212) 252-7370; mbordonaro@porcelanosa-usa.com 2. Module Size: 11” x 11” mesh-mounted 3. Thickness: 3/7” 4. Face: Plain with square edges. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 5 5. Finish: Gloss 6. Tile Color and Pattern: mesh-mounted 7. Grout Color: Laticrete #90 Light Pewter, 1/8” 8. Thinset: White E. Tile Type BR/TL-04: Marble Floor Tile. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Artistic Tile Chevron Stone Mosaic, Item SCGMPCHV1X3, Calacatta Gold. Michal Abehsera (347) 206-6337; michalabehsera@artistictile.com 2. Module Size: 9 ¾” x 12 1/16 x 3/8” 3. Face: Plain with square edges. 4. Finish: Polished 5. Tile Color and Pattern: Calacatta Gold. Pattern as indicated on drawings. 6. Grout Color: Laticrete Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range. F. Tile Type BR/TL-04A: Marble Floor Tile. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Artistic Tile Opus 5, Calacatta Gold. Michal Abehsera (347) 206-6337; michalabehsera@artistictile.com 2. Module Size: 4 7/8” x 12” x 3/8” 3. Finish: Polished 4. Tile Color and Pattern: Calacatta Gold. Pattern as indicated on drawings. 5. Grout Color: Laticrete Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range. 6. Top Edge: Opus 5 (bullnose/rounded rop) 2.3 THRESHOLDS PRODUCTS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. See details on drawings. B. Tile Type BR/STT-01, BR/STT-02, BR/STT-04: Threshold at Door or Shower. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marble, Calacatta White, as distributed by Stone Source/ Brant Adams (212) 979-6400; brant@stonesource.com. 2. Dimensions: as indicated on drawings and schedule. 3. Thickness: Varies, see drawings 4. Finish: Polished. Polish must meet a minimum DCOF of 0.42 5. Color: Calcatta White. 6. Grout Color: Laticrete Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 6 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. 2.6 ACOUSTIC MEMBRANE/CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. A cross-linked polyolefin foam sheet combined with an aggressive rubberized adhesive and a polyester mesh fabric. A peel-and-stick sheet membrane the reduces impact and airborne sound transmissions and isolates finished flooring from from subfloor cracks. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: Protecto Wrap, WhisperMat-CS. a. Thickness: 110 mil (2.8 mm). b. Elongation: 500%, minimum, (rubberized adhesive only) when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. c. Robinson Floor Test: Rated for light commercial applications when tested in accord- ance with ASTM C627. d. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rating: 72 when tested in accordance with ASTM E90. e. Impact Isolation Class (IIC) Rating: 71 when tested in accordance with ASTM E492. f. Delta IIC Rating: 16 when tested in accordance with ASTM E2179. 2. Accessories a. Adhesive: Protecto Wrap, No. 6000 Water-Based Primer. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 7 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick. 2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by 0.062-inch (1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. b. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat. c. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring. d. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m). B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ardex X77 Microtec Fiber Reinforced Polymer Modified Thin Set Mortar or comparable product by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 3. At Accent Tile: provide white thin set. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Laticrete International, Permacolor Grout (except at wall accent tile BR/TL-03, provide 1600 Unsanded Grout). 2. Polymer Type (at wall accent tile BR/TL-03 areas only): styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Laticrete International, SpectraLOCK PRO Premium epoxy grout. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 8 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.9 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Schluter Edge, Sheine, product E125/V4A, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed specifically for indicated applications; stainless-steel Type 316 L non-brushed, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. C. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 9 D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. E. Floor and Wall Sealer for Stone Tile and marble thresholds: Colorless, stain- resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Miraseal 511 H2O Plus F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. c. Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer. d. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer. e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout. f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-257 Silicone Grout Sealer. 2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. 2.12 SHOWER PAN AND CURB A. Shower pan: Provide pre-formed shower pan base 1. Products: Hydroban pre-formed sloped shower pan by Laticrete, size as required on the drawings. Pan shall be suitable for tiling. 2. Drain: Off center linear drain, stainless steel by Laticrete compatible with hydroban pan system. B. Curbs: Provide pre-formed curbs 1. Product: Hydroban pre-formed curb by Laticrete, size as required on the drawings. Curbs shall suitable for tiling. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 11 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Glass Mosaic Tile: 1/8” 2. Wall Tile and Base: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Floor Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). F. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 2. Do not extend crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. G. Match stone tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern. Reject or relocate stone tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 12 H. Mix stone tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns. I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.6 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT/CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install acoustic treatment/crack isolation membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over acoustic treatment/crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 13 B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F121: Cement mortar bed (thickset) on waterproof membrane; TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1A/ANSI A108.1B/ANSI A108.1C. a. Tile Type: BR/TL-01 and BR/TL-04 b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout & Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122. a. Tile Type: BR/TL-01 and BR/TL-04 b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout & Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 3. Tile Installation F135: Thin-set mortar on acoustic treatment; TCA F135. a. Tile Type: BR/TL-01 and BR/TL-04 b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded & Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCA W243. a. Tile Type: BR/TL-01A and BR/TL-04A b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded & water-cleanable epoxy grout. C. Shower Receptor and Bathtub/Wall Installations, Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation B421: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCA B421. a. Tile Type: BR/TL-02 & BR/TL-03 Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. (use white thin-set at accent tile, TL-03.) Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TILING 093000 - 14 b. Grout: Standard unsanded cement at BR/TL03 and Polymer-modified sanded grout at BR/TL-02 END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "099123 Interior Painting" for priming wall surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points. B. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of UBC Standard 8-2. 3. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA 265/ NFPA 286 and complying with test protocol and criteria in the 2003 IBC. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Attic Stock by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERINGS A. Wallcovering BR/WC-01: Maya Vinyl Seasscape by Koroseal, Marguex House, (212) 751-1595, mhouse@koroseal.com 1. Name: Maya Vinyl Seascape 2. Product: SEA-102 3. Color: Crème 4. Size: 54” width 5. Pattern: Random match, reverse hang B. Wallcovering SR/WC-02: Tussah Clay Thom Filicia Collection by MDC Wallcovering, Karen Mandia, (800) 621.40006, kmandia@mdcwall.com 1. Name: Thom Filicia Collection 2. Product: TFC1197/4714 3. Color: Tussah Clay 4. Size: 54” width 5. Pattern: Random match C. Wallcovering BR/WC-03: Aran Isles by MDC Wallcovering, Karen Mandia, (800) 621-4006, kmandia@mdcwall.com 1. Name: Aran Isles 2. Product: BBAI25/4714 3. Color: Donegal Grey 4. Size: 54” width 5. Pattern: Random reversible D. Wallcovering SR/WC-04: Shadow Leaves Golden Grey by by MDC Wallcovering, Karen Mandia, (800) 621.40006, kmandia@mdcwall.com 1. Name: Shadow Leaves Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 2. Product: W2SL04/4714 3. Color: Golden Grey 4. Size: 52” width 5. Pattern: Straight across match 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "99123 Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall- covering manufacturer. D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. E. Metal Primer: Interior ferrous metal primer complying with Division 09 Section "99123 Interior Painting." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 4 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 5. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. D. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finish floor. E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches (150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 5 C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Galvanized metal. 2. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 3. Wood. 4. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 6. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. . C. Colors: As indicated on the drawings. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50 (Master Painters Institute) Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1-E3 2. Environmental Performance Rating: as specified by MPI B. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95 (Master Painters Institute) 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1-E3 2.4 LATEX PAINTS A. As indicated on drawings. 2.5 ALUMINUM PAINT A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1 (Master Painters Institute) 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1-E3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying- Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex satin/semigloss. 2. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.4D. a. Prime Coat: Vinyl wash primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. d. Topcoat: Interior latex satin/semigloss. B. Wood Panel Substrates: Including medium-density fiberboard/hardboard. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.4A. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.4B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd semigloss. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.4T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex semigloss. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.4S. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex semigloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex as indicated on drawings. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex as indicated on drawings. 3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Private-use bathroom accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Material: 1. See drawings for material to be salvaged and re-installed C. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices as required to prevent delaying the Work. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide mfr standard warranty on all fixtures and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. E. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, install the following: B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: BR/ACC-100. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Alteo, K-37054-CP. 2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: BR/ACC-101. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Alteo, K-73147. 2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. D. Towel Bar: BR/ACC-102. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Alteo 18” Towel Bar (K-37050). 2. Description: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) round tube with circular end brackets. 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Length: 18". 5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 E. Towel Bar: BR/ACC-103. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Alteo 24” Towel Bar (K-37051). 2. Description: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) round tube with circular end brackets. 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Length: 24". 5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. F. Robe Hook: BR/ACC-105. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Alteo Robe Hook, K-37055-CP. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. G. Robe Hook: BR/ACC-106. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Double Robe Hook, K-730146. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Polished chrome. 4. H. Corner Shower Shelf: BR/ACC-107. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kohler Meduim Shower Basket, K-1896-S. 2. Description: Corner Shower Shelf. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Polished stainless. I. Tile Termination Edge: BR/ACC-108. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Schluter Systems 1.1 Schluter Schienne, E125/V4a. 2. Description: Tile Termination Edge. 3. Material and Finish: 316L Stainless Steel non-brushed. J. Glass Shower Doors and Panels: BR/SD-100, 101, 102, & 103. See drawings 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Glass shower doors by Southern Glass 2. Glass: 3/8” tempered glass with CleanCoat glass treatment 3. Mounting: Square fasteners and concealed 4. Height: See drawings 5. Material and Finish: Bright polished K. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 Construction Documents TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide and install in-wall grounds for all accessories. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and grounds indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 1 SECTION 210500 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 3 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 4 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide Contractor for General Trades with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 6 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 5 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final chilled water connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air, and vacuum connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500 - 6 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 1 SECTION 211010 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded Fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded Fittings: Class 125, cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 2 c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. B. Copper to Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. 2. Dielectric pipe fittings. C. Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). 2.4 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. C. Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Victaulic, Watts or approved equal. 2.5 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 3 C. Spacing Schedule (Maximum Distance between Hangers (ft.-in.): NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (IN.) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8 Steel Pipe except Threaded Lightwall N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Copper Tube 8-0 8-0 10-0 10-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Rod Size (in.) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 D. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller, complying with NFPA 13. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements, complying with NFPA 13. E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal, complying with NFPA 13. F. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For weights under 1,000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. G. Hangers for fire protection piping as specified and in accordance with NFPA 13.. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. Adjustable swivel ring type hangers are permitted for 3 in. and smaller piping. 2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas. B. All bushings and nipples required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 4 2.7 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2. Schedule 40 PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces and existing construction. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18 gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. 2.8 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. 2.9 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.10 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A" - Piping Materials at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. B. See Exhibit "B" - Testing at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 5 Offset piping and change elevation as required, to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. B. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. C. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers on diesel engine exhaust piping where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. B. Grooved Mechanical Joints: Pipes joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves of a single manufacturer. Lubricate and install gasket and couplings. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 6 Grooved ends shall be clean and free of indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. C. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. D. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls above grade: Use sealing element. 3. Exterior walls below grade and above floors: Use sealing element. 4. Cored holes: Use sealing element. 5. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 6. Waterproofed walls/floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Fire suppression systems shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for two (2) hours in accordance with NFPA 13. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 7 B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. 3.9 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative and shall be justified by hydraulic calculations. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010 - 8 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Sprinkler (wet) Schedule 40, black steel, 2 in. and smaller Cast or malleable iron Threaded EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Sprinklers Test hydrostatically at 200 psi for two (2) hours in accordance with NFPA 13. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300 - 1 SECTION 211300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the 2015 International Code referenced edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: 1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 24: Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. 3. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. 4. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code. 5. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. B. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices to comply with the latest edition of the following publications, codes, standards, and listings/approvals: 1. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Approval Guide. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 3. 2015 International Fire Code. 4. 2017 Uniform Code Supplement. 5. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 6. Requirements of Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed or [and] FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service. D. The fire protection work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection sprinkler systems. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300 - 2 E. Preparation of working plans, calculations and site observation of systems shall be completed by a NICET Level III technician under the direction of a qualified New York State Registered Professional Engineer. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire protection system shall be a wet pipe automatic sprinkler system arranged to properly protect spaces as indicated. B. The system shall be an ordinary hazard pipe schedule system in accordance with all provisions of the Contract Documents and any Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Maximum coverage for any sprinkler head shall not exceed NFPA requirements and the listing for the sprinklers provided. D. Provide 3/16 in. x 1 in. cadmium plated carbon steel chains and master keyed all brass case hardened padlocks to lock water supply valves in the proper position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to: a. Manufacturer's model number. b. Materials, size, finish and type of connection. c. Pressure ratings of components. d. FM approval/UL listing. B. Certification: Submit Contractor's NICET certification and number. C. Samples: 1. If requested, submit sample of sprinklers. D. Drawings and Calculations: 1. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a New York State Registered Professional Engineer. 2. Submit complete NFPA 13 drawings and hydraulic calculations with cross reference to applicable drawings, water supply data, and equipment schedule with ratings for the system to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300 - 3 3. Drawing shall be fabrication drawings provided to indicate actual sprinkler, standpipe and equipment layouts. Drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'-0" scale on reproducible sheets of uniform size. Drawings shall show all data required by NFPA 13. 4. Submit drawings in one (1) complete package. E. Record Drawings and Documents: 1. Submit Record Drawings, test reports, and NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable. 2.2 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Brass or bronze, 1/2 in. orifice, 1/2 in. NPT. 165°F ordinary temperature classification for light and ordinary hazards. Use 286°F sprinklers in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Rooms; in vicinity of heat equipment/sources; and in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler Types and Design Equipment: 1. Quick Response Concealed Pendent: Reliable Model G4A. C. Flexible Sprinkler Drops: 1. FM Approved braided Type 304 stainless steel tube with union joints, factory tested to 400 psi and listed for up to three (3) 90° bends including bracket for mounting to ceiling or building structure. a. Design Equipment: Victaulic "VicFlex". 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. At control, test and drain valves, provide permanently marked identification signs constructed of 18 gauge steel with baked enameled finish. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. Additional signs, shall be provided at each alarm check and dry pipe valve to clearly indicate hydraulic calculation data. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings. B. Piping shall not pass directly over electric panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar electric and telephone equipment. However, protection for these spaces shall be provided. C. Provide a readily removable flushing connection consisting of a cap at each end of cross mains. D. Fire department connections shall be installed 3 ft. above finished grade and water motor gongs approximately 10 ft. above finished grade. E. Upright sprinklers directly on branch lines shall be installed with their frame parallel to the piping. F. Provide sprinkler protection under ductwork, groups of ductwork and other obstructions to water spray and distribution. Use intermediate level sprinklers if subject to waterspray from above. G. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting. H. Coordinate and activate the systems or portions of the system to operational status as soon as possible. 3.2 PIPING, VALVES AND HANGERS A. Refer to other applicable sections. B. All piping shall be installed to permit drainage of the system through a main drain valve. Where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of the system, auxiliary drains shall be provided. The auxiliary drain assembly shall consist of a lockable ball valve, nipple and cap or plug and shall be located 7 ft. or less above the finished floor. Pipe drain to an accessible location. 3.3 TESTS A. General: 1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building construction or backfill. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300 - 5 2. Give the Owner's Representative advance notice of final tests. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully completed. Use NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificate Forms. 3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking, etc. to correct leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel. 4. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections if possible. B. Pressure Tests: 1. Hydrostatic Tests: Minimum 200 psi and in accordance with NFPA 13 for two (2) hours. a. Air test not accepted as final test. 2. Do not subject existing systems to excess pressures. 3.4 SYSTEM TURNOVER A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. Provide one (1) new original pamphlet of NFPA 25. Indicate in writing to the Owner's Representative the provisions for proper maintenance, testing, and inspection of the systems as required by local fire codes. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 1 SECTION 220500 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 3 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 4 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide Contractor for General Trades with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 6 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 5 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final chilled water connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air, and vacuum connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500 - 6 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents VALVES 220523 - 1 SECTION 220523 VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES - GENERAL A. Valves shall have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies. 2. Stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line. 3. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Balance Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Red White, Taco, Tour and Anderson. 2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Watts. 3. Check Valves: Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Stockham, Watts. 4. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs. C. Ball Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free, forged copper silicon 2-piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stem packing, separate packing and handle nut, blowout proof stem extended for insulation, vinyl insulator for handle, 600 WOG, 125 WSP; Watts LF-FBV-3C Series (threaded ends) or Watts LF-FBVS-3C series (sweat ends). Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents VALVES 220523 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all shutoff, check, balancing and other type valves as indicated, as required by Code and as required for proper system maintenance, isolation and safety. Provide at major building and systems sections. Provide shutoff valves on all branch lines serving two fixtures or more, at all equipment, fixtures, before and after automatic control valves, and at future connections. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves with stems at or above the horizontal position. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin level. C. Provide drain valves with hose thread connections on all equipment. Provide hose thread drain valves at all low points to enable complete drainage of all piping systems including, water mains, branches, at base of vertical risers and at strainers. D. Inspect valves for proper operation before installation. Install underground valve boxes vertically over each valve. Adjust top of box to proper grade. Immediately backfill with crushed stone and carefully tamp into place. Unless otherwise noted, leave in the open position. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 1 SECTION 221010 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type K or L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Fittings: Wrought copper and copper alloy, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy, ASME B16.18; solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. E. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 2 2.3 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. 1. Copper not allowed for urinal waste. B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. D. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.4 NO-HUB CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI Standard 301, no-hub cast iron, bitumen coated. 1. For above grade only. B. Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub drainage pattern, bitumen coated. C. Couplings: 1. 1-1/2 in. to 2 in.: CISPI standard 310 with 300 series stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve (or) same as specified for 3 in. and larger. 2. 3 in. and Larger: 24 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel housing clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, 60 in. lbs. minimum torque rating, shall meet requirements of pipe manufacturer and shall be compatible with specified pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clamp-All Coupling System, Tyler "Wide Body", Husky "Series 2000", Mission "Heavy Weight" or approved equal. D. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. 2.5 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Cast Iron to Lead Pipe: Red brass ferrules and wiped joints. Caulk ferrule into cast iron hub. B. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. C. Copper to Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 3 2. Dielectric pipefittings. D. Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). E. No-Hub, Cast Iron, Glass, Polypropylene or High Silicon Cast Iron: Proper adapter to piping being connected. F. Cast Iron and PVC Sovent: Aerators and deaerators as manufactured by Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2.6 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.7 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. 5. Provide hot dipped galvanized finish for hangers and accessories installed in exterior locations and interior areas with moist environment conditions such as pools, pool filter rooms, areaways, garages and similar areas. C. Spacing Schedule: Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size 3/4 in. to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Each 3/8 in. 1-1/4 in. to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Horizontal 3/8 in. 2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Joint 5 ft. 1/2 in. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 4 Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size 5 in. and over 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Maximum 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. O.C. 3/4 in. Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions. D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports: 1. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base, at each floor and 15 ft. on center, maximum. Freestanding vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets attached to the building construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative. 3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10 ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear. Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement. E. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. G. Supports: 1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 5 H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or pipe clamps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. Fasten piping to trapeze at every third support. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. I. Cabinet Pipe Space Supports: 1. Piping below casework countertops within space behind cabinet shall be supported using continuous slot metal channels with pipe clamps. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. J. Piping systems with material not listed above shall be supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.8 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. B. All cleanout plugs, bushings and nipples, required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. C. Hubless cast iron fitting restraints shall be Holdrite Series #117 or approved equal. 2.9 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.10 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 6 Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.11 STACK SLEEVE A. Cast iron body with caulking recess, flashing clamp and under deck clamp. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Series 1720, Zurn, Wade. 2.12 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (Plumbing) piping. B. See Exhibit "B", "Testing" at end of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 7 B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beams clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic piping per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger that 2- 1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 inches of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. B. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. C. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. D. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. E. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 8 F. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior Walls and Below Grade Cored Holes: Use sealing element. 3. Cored Holes: Use sealing element. 4. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 5. Waterproofed Walls/Floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to Exhibit "B" at the end of this section for testing of Plumbing Systems. B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. C. Domestic Water: 1. Do not cover joints with insulation until required tests are completed and the Owner's Representative accepts the system. 2. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Piping shall be tight and show no loss of pressure. 3. Air test not acceptable as final test. 4. Confirm in writing that tests and flushing have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. D. Sanitary and Storm: 1. There shall be no loss of water when testing interior piping. 2. Air test not acceptable as final test. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 9 3. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction be detected in sewers and/or floors or walls of appurtenant structures, they shall be permanently stopped. Should any defective pipes, fitting or accessories be discovered they shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4. Confirm in writing that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. 3.9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Cleaning and disinfecting shall be in accordance with requirements of New York State Department of Health and authority having jurisdiction. Prior to disinfecting, flush piping to remove any sediment and debris. B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. C. After disinfection procedures, submit water samples in sterile bottles to an approved Department of Health Laboratory. Samples shall be proven equal to the water quality served to the public from the existing water supply system and acceptable to the Department of Health. Flush and disinfect all sections of pipe that fail the laboratory tests. Submit test results indicating water is potable. 3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010 - 10 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Domestic water interior/hot, cold and circulating 3 in. and smaller Type L copper Wrought or cast copper No-lead solder Sanitary, sanitary vent and grease waste Service weight cast iron soil pipe Cast iron hub and spigot Neoprene compression type gasket Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Storm Service weight cast iron soil pipe Cast iron hub and spigot Neoprene compression type gasket Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Indirect waste Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Domestic water Test hydrostatically at 150 PSI for two (2) hours or at 1.5 times the working pressure when working pressure exceeds 100 PSI Sanitary, sanitary vent, storm Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Indirect waste Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000 - 1 SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 - "Products" of this section. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF FIXTURES A. Fixtures and trim shall be of those manufacturers listed, unless otherwise indicated. Fixtures for this project shall be of same manufacturer. 1. Water Closets: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Gerber, Kohler, or Mansfield. 2. Lavatories: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Gerber, Kohler, or Mansfield. 3. Faucets: Chicago Faucets, Cambridge, Moen, Symmons, Delta, or Zurn. 4. Closet Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church or Olsonite. 5. Supplies, Stops and Traps: McGuire, Brasscraft, EBC or Sanitary Dash. B. Exposed parts of trim shall have polished chrome plated finish. C. Tubular drainage products ("P" traps, nipples, etc.) shall be 17 gauge brass. D. All fixtures Type A, unless otherwise noted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of the Plumbing Fixture Law of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. B. Comply with the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 "Requirements for the Physically Challenged". C. Comply with NSF Standard 61, Section 9 Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third-party testing and certification. D. All fixture trim used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER CLOSETS A. WC-A: 1. Refer to "A" drawings for water closet model fitted with the following: a. Supply fitting, loose key, Brass Craft Model SCS401DLC. b. Centoco Model 800STSS, white solid plastic closed front closet seat with cover and self sustaining ring, extra heavy duty, for elongated bowl. c. Cast iron closet flange with stainless steel bolts and wax setting ring, Oatey #165 for 3 inch pipe or equal. d. China bolt caps. 2.2 LAVATORIES A. LAV-A: 1. Refer to "A" drawings for model, fitted with the following: a. Existing faucet to be reused. b. McGuire PW8089, "P" trap, 1-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in., cast with cleanout plug, pre-wrapped insulation kit, chrome plated escutcheon. c. McGuire No. 167LK, 3/8 inch chrome plated wall supplies with loose key angle stops, cast brass set screw escutcheons and 12 inch long flexible risers. B. LAV-B: 1. Refer to "A" drawings for model, fitted with the following: a. Match existing faucet. b. McGuire PW8089, "P" trap, 1-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in., cast with cleanout plug, pre-wrapped insulation kit, chrome plated escutcheon. c. McGuire No. 167LK, 3/8 inch chrome plated wall supplies with loose key angle stops, cast brass set screw escutcheons and 12 inch long flexible risers. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install fixtures, equipment and systems as shown on Drawings or specified herein in accordance with provisions of each applicable Specification Section and all local and state codes having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Carefully drill holes for through bolts to avoid chipping blocks or plaster. C. Except where carriers are specified, attach hangers or brackets to walls as follows: 1. Masonry Construction: Secure fixture hangers to partition by thru-bolts extending through a steel plate on opposite side of partition. Obtain Owner's Representative's approval prior to work. 2. Metal Stud Construction: Anchor backing for fixtures or equipment to 1/8 in. x 12 in. steel plate bolted or riveted to at least three studs. Obtain Owner's Representative's approval prior to work. D. Anchor carriers to concrete floor with 1/2 in. x 3 in. anchor or thru-bolts and washers. Quantity of anchors: Water Closets - four (4); Lavatories and Urinals - Eight (8). Provide for drilling of floor and installation of expansion shields. E. Seal fixtures in contact with walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone caulk. Match color to fixture color. F. Set counter mounted sinks and lavatories in a bed of silicone caulk. G. Set floor mounted water closets in a bed of approved setting compound which shall cover the entire perimeter of the closet that comes in contact with the floor. H. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals. I. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. J. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. K. Immediately after installation, provide protective covering over fixtures and trim. 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Mount fixtures at height as indicated on Architectural plans and elevations. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000 - 4 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 23. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to provide proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Clean fixtures, fittings, spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. E. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, and retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1 SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 4 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide Contractor for General Trades with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 6 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final chilled water connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air, and vacuum connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 1 SECTION 260501 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories: 1. Conduit 2. Surface Metal Raceway 3. Expansion Fittings 4. Wireway and Wire Trough 5. Channel Support Systems 6. Conductors 7. Cables 8. Cable Termination and Splice Kits 9. Poke-Through Service Fittings 10. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets 11. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 12. Telephone/Data Communication Outlets 13. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors 14. Flashing, Sealing, Firestopping Materials 15. Salvageable Materials 16. Testing reports prior to energizing equipment and materials. 1.4 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Salvageable materials will be reviewed and identified by the Owner. Items selected by the Owner shall be delivered to a selected location on the Owner's property by this contract in an equal condition to prior this work. B. Items normally accepted as salvage by the Owner: 1. Transformers 2. Meters, meter sockets and test switches 3. Deadfront switchgear 4. Panelboards and covers 5. Circuit breakers 6. Disconnects (100 AMP and up) 7. Adjustable speed drives 8. Motor starters 9. Luminaires 10. Fire alarm equipment 11. Motors above 1/2 HP and up 12. Environmental and automation control equipment 13. Telephones Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel; UL listed "electrical metallic tubing." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 3. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electro- galvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company 4. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 for concrete encasement, Schedule 80 for direct burial or where exposed) shall be UL listed "rigid non-metallic conduit" for application in underground, encased, and exposed applications in accordance with Article 352 of the National Electrical Code. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 4 The conduit shall be made from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be rated for 90ºC conductors. Conduit and fittings shall be tested in accordance with the testing requirements defined in NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL-514. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Carlon 2) Heritage Plastics 3) PW Eagle 5. Surface Aluminum Two Compartment Metallic Raceway shall be constructed of heavy #6063-T5 extruded aluminum, .080 in. wall thickness with a satin anodized finish. a. Provide with receptacles, telephone and data outlets as specified and shown on the Drawings. b. Provide with NEC required dividers. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Wiremold 3,000, 4,000 Series. B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 5 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal C. Wireway and Wire Trough: 1. Wireway and Wire Trough shall be hinged cover type wireway with provisions for full lay-in along the entire length of run. Wireway shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish. Provide NEMA 1 units for interior/dry/clean locations and NEMA 12 for interior dry maintenance/shop/utility locations. Size to meet NEC fill requirements or larger as noted on Contract Documents. Provide knockouts along runs. Recess in wall where required for flush mounted equipment. Hinge shall be on the bottom of front face for horizontal mounting. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D "Square Duct" 2) General Electric 3) Hoffman 4) Meco D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Provide poured-in-place inserts for supporting channels at poured concrete walls and ceilings. Channel shall be steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 6 E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2 for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2. Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application. a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Three Phase 120/208V Three Phase 277/480V Ground Green Green Neutral White Gray A or L1 Black Brown B or L2 Red Orange C or L3 Blue Yellow b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite 5) Senator Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 7 F. Terminal Lugs and Connectors: 1. "Split-bolt" Connectors shall be solderless type. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Kearney 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 5) Anderson 2. "TWIST ON" Connectors shall be spiral steel spring type and insulated with vinyl cap and skirt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3-M Company "Scotch-Lok" 2) Ideal "Wing-Nuts" 3) Approved equal G. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened (screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds 2. Telephone/Data Communications Outlet Boxes: a. 4 in. x 4 in. x 2-1/8 in. minimum outlet box with single gang plaster ring with cover plate suitable for indicated communications outlet and conduit routed to cable tray. Cover plate shall match the receptacle cover type. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 8 3. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal H. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets: 1. Terminal and equipment cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and grey baked enamel finish. Boxes and front shall be UL listed and shall be minimum 35 in. H x 24 in. W x 6 in. D. Provide removable insulated plywood terminal board mounted on inside back wall of cabinet. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Square D "Mono-Flat" 2) Approved equal I. Wiring Devices: 1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors, etc.) shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle face shall be as directed by the Architect. Provide device cover plates of satin finish type 302 stainless steel in finished areas and rounded raised (Steel City 450/460 series) only for surface mounted locations in unfinished areas. Provide neoprene gasketed cast aluminum/zinc box with hinged rain tight cast aluminum/zinc lockable while in use cover with stainless steel hardware for devices designated "WP". a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pass and Seymour 2) Hubbell 3) Leviton Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 9 2. Toggle/Snap Switches: a. Units shall be quiet operation, quick make/quick break, rated for 20A/120-277V/1hp at 120/277V, 90° rear plug in termination with pig tail, with nylon/polycarbonate toggle, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal and silver alloy contacts. Units shall meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. Single pole units shall be Hubbell HBL1221, P&S 20AC1 or Leviton 1221-2. Provide two pole, three way, four way, illuminated handle, keyed, etc. type of the same quality and model. b. Momentary Contact: Units shall be as indicated above (20A, 277V, nylon handle, side/back wired), three position, two circuit/three wire with spring return to center position, provide where indicated and as needed for proper system operation. Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1250, Leviton 1256 or approved equal. Provide keyed operation or pilot light where indicated. 3. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V, #14 to 10AWG screw terminals 90° rear plug in termination with pig tail with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal Meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall be: Hubbell 5352, P&S CRB5362 or Leviton 5352. c. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 5mA interrupting ground fault level, test/reset front buttons, full through feed capability, power off on reverse wired sensing, 10kA short circuit current rating, be tamper/weather resistant and in compliance with UL 943. Unit shall self-test function to periodically test the components automatically and indicate a failure condition utilizing an LED. Shall be Hubbell GFR5362, P&S 2096TR or Leviton S7599TR. d. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have protective shutters to prevent entry into the line or grounded front openings unless all plug prongs are present. Shall be Hubbell BR20TR, P&S TR5362 or Leviton 6362TR. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 10 4. Lighting Dimmers: a. Provide lighting dimmer where indicated suitable for the type of luminaire for even continuous control. Unit shall be rated for the indicated connected load plus 25% minimum (even when ganged). Review luminaire schedule for type and loading. Provide for three-way control as indicated. b. Dimmers to be Lutron "Nova" NT-(1000W minimum) with debuzzing coil for incandescent. c. Low voltage dimming shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer for magnetic or solid state. d. LED dimmers shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer and be listed for use with the associated driver. e. Device color shall match the toggle switch. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Lutron 2) Approved equal 5. Occupancy/Vacancy (Automatic/Manual) Sensors: a. Sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum: 1) Zero crossing switching operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating. 2) Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation. 3) Motion sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 20 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial). 4) Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz. 5) UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer full replacement warranty. 6) Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 11 7) Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation. 8) Operation shall have adjustable time delay. Occupancy sensors shall have automatic on and vacancy sensors shall have manual on. 9) Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit. 10) Unit color shall match the project devices except for the ceiling mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect. 11) Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment). 12) Provide components as needed for the indicated control. 13) A factory authorized representative shall coordinate and instruct the start up services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and start up supervision and adjustment. b. Wall Mounted - Passive Infrared (PIR): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR technology motion sensing. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 12 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Pass & Seymour Model OS300S (Design Make) b) Hubbell c) Watt Stopper d) Sensor Switch c. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and Ultrasonic): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model AD2000 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch d. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching: 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have two on/off buttons and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. To have two contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum switching capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 13 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model AD2000X2 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch e. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Ultrasonic: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize ultrasonic sensing. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be programmable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 14 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch f. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch g. Ceiling Mounted - Vacancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 15 Operation shall require manual operation of momentary wall switch for lighting to be switched on and automatic off. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Provide momentary switch(es) and any other needed equipment for indicated operation. 8) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch h. Switch Pack: 1) Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the quantity of circuits). 2) Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic box. 3) Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) occupancy sensors. Multiple sensors shall be able to control a single switch pack. 4) Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277VAC. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 16 i. Testing: 1) Each occupancy sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after installation. 2) Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, etc. 3) Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner. J. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping: 1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Wiring 600 Volts or Less Installed Below Grade, in Concrete Floor Slabs or Below Ground Floor Slab: Rigid non-metallic conduit encased in concrete with rigid metal conduit bends and penetrations through building floors and walls. 3. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 18 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in. 9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication, "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades. 14. Raceways installed in concrete slabs shall be located so as not to affect structural integrity of slab, and such that conduit shall have a minimum of 1 in. of concrete cover on all sides. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1 in. trade size in concrete slabs. Raceways in slabs shall be for floor box use only. 15. Raceways installed below ground floor slab shall be encased in concrete with 3 in. minimum coverage on all sides. Where possible, install conduit directly below slab with concrete envelope poured monolithic with slab. Where this is not possible, support raceways and envelop maximum 5 ft. - 0 in. on centers from underside of structural slab by means of galvanized pipe hangers. Pipe hangers shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Installation shall maintain integrity of waterproofing membrane. 16. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 17. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 18. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 19 19. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 20. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 21. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. 22. At each flush mounted panelboard, terminal cabinet, control cabinet, etc., provide four (4) spare 3/4 in. raceways from panelboard, etc., to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90° turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation of raceway, and cap. 23. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. 24. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers, environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows: a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel conduit within space wall/separation. b. Seal raceway penetration through the wall/separation. c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation. d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide a complete air barrier after conductors are installed. e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 20 25. Raceway installed in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway. C. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Provide minimum 6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination. 10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. 11. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices. 12. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. 13. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "Ty- Raps" or equal. 14. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 21 15. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. 16. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes. 17. Provide cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC. D. Outlet Boxes: 1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. Comply with the NEC relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls. 2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of 5 ft. in any direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The above modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line. 4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from door frame. 5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring, splices and device(s) to be installed in accordance with the NEC. 7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled hollow cavity walls shall be installed flush with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. Boxes shall be mechanically fastened and supported by two (2) adjacent structural members (studs) with cross brackets (Garvin Industries Model BMB or approved equal). 8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed flush and have extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 22 9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep, galvanized sheet metal. 10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes. 11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type. 12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices. E. Receptacles: 1. Provide 20 ampere 125 volt, duplex receptacles unless noted otherwise on the drawings. F. Toggle Switches: 1. Switches shall be installed in accessible locations near room/space entryway(s). 2. Provide lighted handle switches in mechanical rooms, elevator pits, electric rooms, etc. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 23 G. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. H. Equipment Mounting Heights: Coordinate with architectural interior and exterior elevations. 1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in. b. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest from floor) 18 in. c. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters d. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters 30 in. e. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also for refrigerators 48 in. f. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, above-grade 24 in. g. Telephone outlets 18 in. h. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in. i. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in. j. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated) 80 in. to bottom of the notification device k. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max) l. Distribution panelboards, to top of backbox 72 in. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 24 m. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets, to top of backbox 72 in. n. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in. 2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. I. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc. 2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. J. Identification: 1. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on switchboards, main service disconnects, transfer switches, motor control centers and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 2. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to each device. 3. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, adjustable speed drives, circuit breakers, etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 4. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc., for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 5. Nameplates shall be engraved black, with white core, with Helvetica medium 3/16 in. lettering. 1/8 in. lettering is acceptable where space of 3/16 in. is not available. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501 - 25 6. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. 7. Provide signage at each electrical service room indicating "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". Utilize adhesive backed, yellow background, block lettering signage at door. 8. Using adhesive backed printed tape label all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation and circuit number. Tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates. K. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc. 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 1 SECTION 260526 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system equal to or exceeding the requirements of NEC and as indicated in the contract documents. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, busway, wire ways, cable trays, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system. B. Provide solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Types of grounding systems include the following: 1. Electrical Service and Transformer Grounding 2. Building Grounding 3. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar 4. Electrical Equipment Grounding 5. Surge Protection Device (SPD) Grounding 6. Telecommunications Grounding 7. Equipotential Grounding Systems 8. Underground Distribution Grounding 9. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the NEC by Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 2 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding conductors, bonding conductors, jumpers, grounded conductors, etc. shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. B. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Ground rods and connectors. 2. Ground bars. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Exposed grounding components such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grounding conductors in raceway with 600V circuiting shall be insulated to match the circuit conductors with green color. 3. Grounding conductors used with system voltage greater than 1000V shall be bare unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grounding conductor size shall be as indicated or as required by the NEC whichever is larger, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise indicated. Sizing shall take into account circuit voltage drop. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Same make as for 600 volt conductors. B. Connectors, Clamps and Terminals: 1. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be made of copper alloy or silicon bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. Bolts and washers (Belleville) shall be of comparable material or stainless steel. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Hubbell Anderson Corp. 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Approved equal Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 3 2. Exothermic Welds: a. Provide exothermic welds designed for size and type of intended cable, rods, structure, etc. Solder prohibited for connections, except for medium and high voltage cable metallic tape shields (utilize mechanical and solder). b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Erico "Cadweld" 2) Burndy "ThermOweld" 3) Approved equal 3. Pipe Clamp: a. Pipe clamp for bonding to pipe type electrode (water pipe, etc.) shall be a suitably sized copper alloy clamp. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy GAR-BU 2) O-Z Gedney Type CG 3) Burndy "Durium" 4) AFL Global "Everdur" 5) Approved equal 4. Flexible Strap: a. Flexible grounding straps shall be of braided high conductivity copper with two hole connector. Strap shall have equal to or greater than ampacity of the system it is bonding to. Strap shall provide flexibility in all directions when installed properly. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) OZ Gedney 3) Approved equal C. Ground Bars 1. Provide ground bars where indicated. Ground bars shall be: a. 98% conductive copper, minimum. b. 4 in. x 1/4 in. thick minimum with length as indicated with minimum 36 in. for electric room/MDF and all other minimum of 24 in. c. Standard NEMA bolt hole patterns with maximum quantity of lug locations. Spacing of 1-1/8 in. apart. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 4 2. Bar shall be mounted to an accessible wall location with galvanized steel hardware and 2000V rated insulators. Mounting shall be suitable for full complement of cabling. 3. Unit shall conform to EIA/TIA standards. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico b. Newton Instrument c. Burndy d. Harger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: 1. Provide grounding conductor(s) with all power circuits. Conductor shall be sized as indicated or as required by the NEC as a minimum and shall be terminated on the equipment, device, enclosure, etc. grounding terminal. Conductor size shall be for the entire length unless approved by the Engineer where oversized for voltage drop. 2. Conductors above grade to ground electrodes (water piping, structural column, etc.) and to equipment (service entrance, ground bars, ground halos, etc.) shall be installed in metallic conduit with ends bonded to the conduit. 3. Grounding conductors shall be installed to have a minimum radius of 3 in. 4. Grounding conductors in a raceway system shall be terminated/bonded to each box, cabinet, enclosure, etc. through which it passes or terminates. 5. Grounding conductors routed with underground circuits shall be bonded to each ground electrode and metallic cable support system within the raceway system including pull and access locations. 6. Stranded conductors penetrating vapor barriers, foundations, slab on grade and water stop membranes shall have the interstitial spaces between strands filled with solder 4 in. beyond the membrane each side. The conductor shall be sealed to the membrane with a manufacturer approved method. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 5 B. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system. 2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type. Utilize grounding bushings as specified elsewhere in these specifications. 3. Conduit which runs to or from boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. 4. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC. C. Connectors Clamps and Terminals: 1. Connectors utilized above grade in dry accessible locations shall be mechanical or exothermic type. 2. Connectors in damp locations, below grade or if not indicated shall be exothermic type. 3. Clean the area near the connecting surfaces prior to any connection to ensure effective contact. Cleaning shall be to the bare metal. Wire brush area if needed to remove rust scale paint, dirt, etc. to expose bare metal. 4. Exothermic connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested with heavy blow of a five pound sledge. D. Flexible Strap: 1. Flexible straps shall be used when bonding vibrating/moveable equipment, with expansion fittings and where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Sufficient slack shall be provided to compensate for the anticipated vibration, movement and expansion. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 6 E. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. The neutral (grounded) conductor of each low voltage, single and/or polyphase system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected to ground at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear to the system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by the NEC. Ground connection shall be to the building grounding system, building steel, building water service, building concrete reinforcement and as indicated. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to the enclosure and secondary neutral bushing, to all electrical utilization and distribution equipment; insulation shall be same type as phase conductors. Transformer enclosures shall be bonded to the primary and secondary circuit grounding conductor. 3. Equipment grounding conductors shall extend from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the source panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear. F. Equipment Grounding: 1. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch circuit conductors. 2. Surge Protection Device (SPD) Ground Conductor Installations: Extend SPD dissipation ground conductors to local equipment ground bus and to common grounding electrode conductors. Size conductors per SPD manufacturer recommendations and the NEC. G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit from building's main service equipment or grounding bus to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents GROUNDING 260526 - 7 3.2 GROUND TERMINAL BUS INSTALLATION A. Install ground terminal bar in rooms where shown on the drawings. Mount bar 18 in. above finished floor by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 in. long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two (2) supports 18 in. on center. Connect all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar. B. Label grounding conductors terminated to bus for equipment, location, electrode, etc served. 3.3 TESTS A. Test the building ground system before backfilling to ensure continuity and determine system resistance value. B. Testing procedure shall be a fall of potential type with a moving auxiliary electrode in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 and reviewed/approved by the Engineer. Sufficient test points shall be taken for accurate resistance value. C. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, no earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Provide tabulated test results indicating distance between rods and resistance readings on a plotted graph. D. Test each ground electrode system separately prior to connection to the system or main building ground bar. Test each system ground electrode system a second time after backfilling has occurred and all final connections (building steel, water service, etc.) have been made. E. Soil type, date, time, meter manufacturer/model number, person performing the test, test witnesses and most recent rainfall shall be noted in test submittal. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 1 SECTION 265000 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide interior and exterior lighting systems, including luminaires, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents for complete and operational systems. Luminaires, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling in which they are to be installed. Verify the ceiling construction details and provide luminaires suitable for the respective ceiling types and room finish schedule. 1.2 ENERGY CONSERVATION WORK A. Work installed as part of this Contract will be eligible for energy rebates/incentives available. The energy rebate shall be paid directly to the Owner. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and [the funding source] to provide proof of purchase information, quantities involved, fill out forms, etc., to accommodate all required paperwork. Include all costs associated with this requirement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All luminaires shall be new and bear a NRTL label for the service intended. Luminaires shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture to the specific type light luminaires specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. Manufacturer's luminaire catalog numbers as indicated on the "Luminaire Schedule" indicate quality, type, and style, but may not cover required special design details. Provide luminaires having such special details as noted in the "Luminaire Schedule", as indicated by the specified luminaire model number and as required for proper installation. Verify the availability of all luminaires proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting same for approval. The discontinuance of production of any luminaire after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved luminaire of comparable quality and design at no additional cost. Luminaires shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule". Luminaire types, appearance, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the specified manufacturer, and associated catalog number, listed in the "Luminaire Schedule". Products of other listed acceptable manufacturers shall be equivalent in every way to that of the luminaire specified. The Engineer reserves the right to disapprove any luminaire type submitted which he feels is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the luminaire specified. B. Should there be any difference between drawings and schedules, secure from Architect/Engineer such information as is necessary before tendering his proposal. When finishes are not definitely specified, they shall be as selected by the Architect. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 2 C. Locations indicated for luminaires are approximate. Field coordinate exact locations as near as possible to the location indicated. Coordinate with the Engineer for any major location changes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings as described in Section 260500. Luminaire shop drawings shall include photometric data for each luminaire utilizing the specified lens/louver type, lamp(s) and ballast(s). All luminaire types for the project shall be submitted in a single complete package which shall be in the form of a soft cover binder with each luminaire separated by an identified index tab. Information on each luminaire shall include: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number. 2. Dimensioned Construction Drawing(s). 3. Complete Catalog "Cut" Sheet. 4. Photometrics (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient of utilization complete values, IES distribution candlepower distribution by angle and luminaire efficiency). 5. Lens/Louver Type. 6. Reflector information (type, material, reflectance, etc). 7. Ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating, overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.). 8. Materials for all components. 9. Socket Type. 10. Lamp (rated life, initial lumen output, mean lumen output, Kelvin color, color rendering index, dimensions, wattage, socket type, mercury content). 11. Certification of IES LM-79 an IES LM-80 testing for LED luminaires. 12. Proof that the lamps and ballasts to be provided are on the Consortium for Energy Efficiency's (CEE) list of approved equipment. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 3 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Luminaires and equipment shall be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed from the site immediately and be replaced with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options, performance and appearance to the luminaires specified in the Luminaire Schedule. Luminaires and all components shall be suitable and rated for the intended use and location. B. LED luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminaries specified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGB systems respectively. 1. LED luminaries shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, connectors, terminators and accessories required for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulse width modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection for high-resolution output. 2. RGB LED systems shall be capable of at least 8-bit control of red, green and blue module. RGB LED system shall be capable of setting each module with a unique and individual address. Each address shall be controlled independently by DMX or alternate method protocol. All RGB LED fixtures shall undergo a minimum of eight-hour burn-in testing during manufacturing. 3. LED luminaries shall be high brightness and binned for forward voltage, luminous flux and wavelength. 4. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input, luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), color temperature and color rendering index) and IESNA LM-80 (output luminous maintenance, 10,000 hour minimum test). Luminaire output shall be a minimum of 60 lumens/watt. Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 50% output. Testing shall be performed by a US Department of Energy (DOE) accredited laboratory. 5. LED drivers shall be solid state Class 1 power supply/driver. The system shall have a minimum 90% power factor and a maximum of 30% THD, and heat sensing with color sensing feed-back. Adequate heat sink capability shall be provided to ensure the rated life. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 4 6. The luminaire (to include LED lamps and LED drivers) shall have a full five (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor. a. Acceptable LED Node Manufacturers: 1) Philips 2) Osram 3) Cree 4) Nichea 5) Lumiled C. Lenses: 1. Shall be listed materials tested in accordance with ASTM D-635, "Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position" and burns less than 2/5 inhes per minute. 2. The products shall have a smoke density of less than 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2843, standard test method for "Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics". 3. The flame spread rating shall not exceed 0-25 and smoke developed rating shall not exceed 450 in accordance with ASTM E-84, standard test method for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 4. Self-ignition shall not occur below 600°F, in accordance with ASTM D-1929, standard test method for "Ignition Properties of Plastics". 5. Materials shall remain in place 15 minutes at 175°F and fall from frame at 200° below ignition temperature in accordance with ASTM D-648, "Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load". D. Wiring: 1. Wiring within lighting fixture for connection to branch circuit shall be: a. NEC Type AF for 120 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG. b. NEC Type SF-2 for 277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG. 2. Stranded wire within lighting fixture shall be lead dipped. E. General: 1. Parabolic open cell luminaires shall have reflector channels for symmetrical distribution at all lamp operations. A minimum of two channels shall be provided. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 5 F. Sockets - Lampholders: 1. Lampholders shall be of porcelain or bakelite with a 660 watt, 660 volt rating. Lampholders approved for use may be the type providing for screw-type wire terminal connections or the type of socket provided with attached leads, or the type permitting push-in locking connection of the ballast wiring; Makes: Bryant, Leviton or Kulka or approved equal. Sockets shall be attached to the socket bars by means of screw/nut arrangement or any other approved means that will insure solid mounting and support of the lampholders. Lampholders shall be of the pressure lock or push-in-and-hold type, and shall be UL listed. G. Exit Luminaires: 1. Electrical characteristics: a. LED type for 120/277 volt supply. b. Use two LED strips for indirect illumination of the face. Meet or exceed illumination requirements of NFPA 101, and all of the requirements of UL924. c. Maximum input power of 5 watts per illuminated face. 2. Construction: a. Light tight assembly. b. Provide Universal mount unit. c. Provide single or double face and arrows as indicated on Contract Documents. H. Luminaire Schedule: 1. Luminaire schedule is found on contract drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Provide for every luminaire shown on the plans, as scheduled on the drawings. B. Where a luminaire is specified or approved for certain locations, all luminaires in those locations must be of the same manufacturer and style. All luminaires shall be NRTL tested. C. Obtain exact location of all ceiling and wall mounted luminaires from the Architect/Engineer. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 6 D. Luminaire fasteners or hangers shall be capable of supporting four times the luminaire weight. E. Luminaires shall be supported independent from ceiling system or other building services. Support luminaires at two locations, using #10 steel wire similar to that used to support the ceiling grid. Directly attach steel wire to structural member. F. Mount luminaires in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Offset luminaires as required to avoid obstructions. Provide all necessary hangers and supports for proper luminaire installation. Such supports shall be anchored to channels in the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members above the suspended ceiling. G. Provide all necessary accessories for "end-to-end" mounting where continuous rows of fluorescent luminaires are indicated. All luminaire assemblies shall be grounded. H. New luminaires may be provided to replace existing luminaires scheduled to remain or be reused, subject to shop drawing approval. 3.2 SURFACE CEILING MOUNTING A. Mount surface luminaires tight to surface in a manner such that mounting surface does not distort fixture. B. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if fixtures are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway. C. Luminaire fasteners or hangers shall be capable of supporting four times luminaire weight. D. Luminaires shall be supported independent from ceiling system or other building services. 3.3 RECESSED MOUNTING A. The Electrical Contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and material prior to placing an order for recessed luminaires. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish fixtures with an IC rating for all recessed incandescent fixtures installed in direct contact with insulation. C. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flanged frames for drywall ceilings. D. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all required mounting hardware and accessories to adapt fixtures to ceiling construction. E. Lay-in type luminaires shall be supported independent of the ceiling system at each end of the luminaire with galvanized support wire. F. Provide and install seismic hold-down clips for all lay-in type lighting fixtures. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 7 3.4 PENDANT MOUNTING A. Mount pendant mounted luminaires from 1/4 in. threaded rods of required length. B. Sleeve threaded rods with 1/2 in. EMT painted with color as directed by Architect/Engineer. C. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if they are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway. 3.5 AIRCRAFT CABLE SUSPENSION A. Cables shall be 1/16 in. aircraft cable with end safety fittings. Cable shall be provided with 2 in. diameter mini-canopy and threaded coupler for attachment to a 1/4 in.-20 threaded stud extending 3/4 in. below ceiling. B. Cable assembly shall include a spring-loaded adjustment device mounted in the fixture. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required supports for cable attachment. D. For cord feed to the luminaire provide continuous cord clip of matching color to attach the cord to the cable. E. Support per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 COVE LIGHTING A. Fluorescent cove lighting shall be installed so as to produce a continuous and unbroken band of light with no shadows or light gaps. B. A combination of 2 ft., 3 ft. and 4 ft. lamp fixtures may be required to accomplish a continuous band of light. 3.7 LAMPS A. Furnish and install required lamps in all luminaires. Any lamp which fails prior to project close-out shall be replaced at no additional cost. B. Replace any lamp or lamps whose color is determined to be unsatisfactory. 3.8 BALLASTS A. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. Statler Hotel Guest Suites Renovation Phase II January 22, 2021 M/E Reference 190282 Construction Documents LIGHTING 265000 - 8 B. Dimming lamps shall be burned in at full brightness for a minimum of 100 hours prior to being used for dimming. Keep a record of all rooms with dimming luminaires and when the lamps were burned in. Submit this record with the lighting operation and maintenance manual. 3.9 GROUNDING A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of all lighting fixtures. B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for this purpose. 3.10 LABELING A. Attach a self-adhesive red dot label, 1/2 in. in diameter, to all lighting fixtures with an integral battery back up and/or those tied into an emergency generator. Labels shall be attached to these fixtures or to adjacent ceiling tiles so that they are readily discernible for testing and maintenance purposes. 3.11 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, finger marks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. 3.12 REMOVAL OF LAMPS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. The Contractor shall employ the service of a certified disposal/recycling service company to dispose of all removed fluorescent and/or HID lamps. All disposal procedures shall be performed in accordance with EPA Requirements and Subtitle C for the disposal of mercury contaminated lamps. END OF SECTION